Kodak PACS LINK 100, 200 Medical Image Manager, PACS LINK 25 Print Server SERVICE MANUAL

PDF

દસ્તાવેજ

જાહેરાત

{ServiceManual}{FinalDraft}{HealthImaging}{Internal}

Publication No. 8E8820

03NOV03

SERVICE MANUAL for the

Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100

Service Codes: 3433, 4223 - 1.2 GHz

Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200

Service Codes: 1539, 4224 - 1.2 GHz and the

Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER

Service Code: 3754

Restricted Information

© Eastman Kodak Company, 2003

PLEASE NOTE

The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman Kodak Company prior to publication.

No patent license is granted by this information.

Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages, resulting from any use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

This equipment includes parts and assemblies sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge. Use caution to prevent damage during all service procedures.

Description Page

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Overview of MIM Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Printers Used with MIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Input Data Formats Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Maximum Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

HIPPA Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

“MIM Service Application” Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

MIM 200 and 25 Print Server: Patient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Tools - Hardware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Software Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Installing the “Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM-Based Products” . . 2-3

Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 . . . . 2-9

Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 . . 2-15

Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT . . . 2-17

Installing “SecureLink” Client Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Starting and Using “SecureLink” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

COMPUTERS with Windows 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection . . . . . . . . 2-30

Quitting the Service Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Buttons and Hot Keys for pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Installing the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Unpacking System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Installing the 25 PS on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Installing the 25 PS on a Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

NOV 2003 – 8E8820

8E8820 – NOV 2003

Installing an EXTERNALMODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Network Isolation for MIM 200: 667 MHz, 1 MHz, 1.2 GHz, 2.4 MHz - European . . . . . . . 3-42

Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Patient Environment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Preparing to Apply Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

De-energizing the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Energizing the MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Upgrading MIM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Saving and Restoring the System Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 667 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7

Setting Up the BIOS for the 25 PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-8

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

Loading New MIM Application Software (Ghosting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

MIM Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER . . . . . . . . 4-15

Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Setting up a PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

Kodak DryView 8700/8500 and 969 HQ LASER IMAGERS and

Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Creating Network Profiles Using the “MIM Service Application” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6

Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Completing Configuration of the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS . 7-33

Checking Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Adjusting Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Notes on Adjusting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Checking the HIS/RIS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70

Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70

Disabling the HIS/RIS GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70

Using the BAR CODE READER with HIS/RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74

Using the BAR CODE READER without HIS/RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74

Obtaining Optimum Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing - Cropping of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Setting Up the SCU for Cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Text Box Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Selecting TFT Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

TFT Set Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Final Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Training the Security Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Providing Service Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE, CD ROM DRIVE, or FLOPPY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Connecting to a MIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Finding an Unknown MIM IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Tools for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Running a Network “Ping” Test from the “MIM Service Application” . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Running a Network “DICOM Echo” Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Changing Level of a Log for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Retrieving the Activity History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Interpreting the Activity History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Interpreting the Error History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Retrieving the Error Frequency Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Clearing the Error Frequency Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Viewing Printing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Troubleshooting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Transferring Files Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . 11-51

Using Windows TASK MANAGER from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE

11-53

Using NT Event Viewer from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE . . . . 11-55

Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57

Illustrated Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Illustrated Parts Breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz Field Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Safety, Regulatory, EMC and CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200

(MIM 200) Safety Requirements Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Setup Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Non-Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

Section 1: System Description

Introduction

This manual provides instructions for installation and maintenance of Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGERS

(MIMs) with V_6.1 and higher software. These systems include the:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

Note

The name “MIM,” as used in this manual, applies to all of the above devices.

Note

For MIM service manuals that apply to software versions older than V_6.1, See “Documentation” on Page 1–16.

How to Use this Manual

This manual includes 14 sections:

• Section 1

provides a general description of MIMs.

• Section 2 describes the hardware and software used as tools for installation and service.

• Sections 3 through 9 provide instructions for installing and setting up MIM SYSTEMS. The Field Engineer (FE) will not need all of these sections for every MIM. The sections cover “types” of MIM: PRINT SERVER, MODALITY SERVER or COMBINATION BOX. See Figure

1–1

. For example, to install a MODALITY SERVER, reference to Sections 5 and 6 is not necessary.

• Section 10 includes procedures for changing MIM configurations.

• Section 11 includes procedures for troubleshooting a MIM.

• Section 12 provides parts information for V_6.1 and higher software.

• Section 13 provides additional information.

• Section 14 provides Warnings and Cautions

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 1–1 Installing and Setting Up a MIM

1-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

Overview of MIM Types

MIMs operate as MODALITY SERVERS, PRINT SERVERS, or both. See Table

1–1 .

Table 1–1 MIM Primary Functions

MIM 200

MIM 100

25 PS

Device MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER

x x x x

• MODALITY SERVERS capture images from digital or video MODALITIES. They have the ability to add annotation to the images and develop STUDIES that include patient demographic data. The STUDIES are converted to DICOM 3.0 and

sent to WORKSTATIONS, ARCHIVES, and PRINTERS or PRINT SERVERS on the network. See Figure 1–2

• PRINT SERVERS receive DICOM 3.0 print-class images from remote users on a DICOM/Ethernet NETWORK, convert these images to the protocol required by a local PRINTER, and send the images to the PRINTER.

Note

The MIM 200 can operate as both a MODALITY SERVER and PRINT SERVER. When it is set up to do so, it is identified as a COMBINATION BOX. The MIM 200 1.2 GHz only functions as either a MODALITY SERVER or a PRINT SERVER, but not a COMBINATION BOX.

A COMPUTER using Windows 2000 and application software from Kodak controls and processes the functions of the MIM.

Special purpose INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS are added to the COMPUTER for external communication.

The MIM does not include a MONITOR, KEYBOARD or MOUSE. For access to the MIM for service, the FE must connect:

• A LAPTOP COMPUTER, or

• A MONITOR KIT that includes a MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE.

Figure 1–2 Example MIM 200 667 MHz, 1.4 GHz, and 2.4 GHz Setup

Keypads or

Host Control Consoles

Digital or Video Modalities

(Non-DICOM)

Keypad or

Host Control

Console Modality

Server

Fiber Optic or Copper

DICOM Net

MODALITY SERVER

DICOM 3.0 Print

Class

9410-01L

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Printers Used with MIMs

The software version listed in the table indicates the minimum software version required for each product.

Table 1–2 PRINTER from PRINT SERVER Cross-Reference Chart

PRINTER

Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER

Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER

Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER

Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER

Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER

Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER /

STANDARD

Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER

Print

Type

Laser

Output Data Format

Laser Optical Interface

Print Request

Laser Optical Interface

Print Request

Laser Ethernet HOSTCOM

Laser 952/COPCIL

Laser DICOM

Interface

CABLES

Fiber Optic

Ethernet

Copper

Ethernet

Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Laser 952/COPCIL Copper

Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic

Laser Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper

Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper

MIM 200

3.2

5.0

4.0, 4.1

5.0

5.2

25 PS

5.0

5.2

5.0

5.2

Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952/COPCIL Copper

Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic

Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER /

STANDARD

Laser Superset or 952/

COPCIL

Copper

Laser Superset or 952/ FOPCIL Fiber Optic Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT

MANAGER

Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER

Laser Superset or 952/FOPCIL Fiber Optic

Laser Superset or 952/

COPCIL

Copper

5.0

5.2

5.0

1-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

Input Options

MIMs use the following interfaces for input of images:

Video Input: A VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is necessary.

Digital Input: A DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD which receives 8-bit Grayscale images is necessary.

Input from Network: An Ethernet 10/100baseT circuit in the MIM connects to an Ethernet 10baseT or 100baseT

NETWORK. The network connection is used for image input when the MIM is set up as a PRINT

SERVER. Images received from the network must conform to DICOM 3.0 print-class protocol.

Input Data Formats Allowed

• Point-to-Point Grayscale Video

• Point-to-Point Color Video

• Point-to-Point Grayscale Digital

• KEYPAD Study Management Requests

• Autofilming: KCL, Siemens, 952/831, Hitachi, Toshiba, YMS

• DICOM Print Request: Grayscale or Color

• DICOM Part 10 File

• Patient Demographics: KEYPAD, KEYBOARD, HIS/RIS Broker

• DICOM MODALITY Worklist Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD

• 3M

Output Options

Network Output: A NETWORK INTERFACE PORT on the MIM provides the connection for an Ethernet

10baseT or 100baseT NETWORK. A MIM can be set up to send images to as many as 25 print or store destinations on the network.

Local PRINTER Output: The following options are available for output to a local PRINTER. Only one output BOARD can be included in a MIM.

Fiber Optic Output:

Copper Output:

Ethernet Output:

A FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT BOARD (FOPCIL) is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from

Kodak with fiber optic inputs. The FOPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in LASER IMAGERS from Kodak. Both image and COM outputs are fiber optic. 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS require a single FIBER OPTIC CABLE, and are driven by an OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.

A COPPER OUTPUT BOARD (COPCIL) is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from Kodak with copper image and COM inputs. The COPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in these LASER IMAGERS.

An Ethernet BOARD and CROSSOVER CABLE are used to drive the 8200 LASER IMAGER, the 160 LASER IMAGER, and the 3600 DMI.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Output Data Formats Allowed

• DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD

• DICOM Color Print Management SCU: TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD

• DICOM Secondary Capture Grayscale and Color Image Store SCU: TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD

• MIM Optical Interface Print Request: 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTER

• 10/100baseT Ethernet HOSTCOM Print: 160 LASER IMAGER

• 10/100baseT Ethernet DICOM Print: 8200 LASER IMAGER

• COPCIL: 8700 and 8500 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD; and 8600, 8610, 8300, and 8100 LASER IMAGERS

• FOPCIL: 8700 and 8500 IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

Maximum Inputs and Outputs

Maximum inputs and outputs allowed for MIMs are described in Table

1–3 .

Table 1–3 Maximum Inputs and Outputs for MIMs

MIM

200

Function

MODALITY SERVER (SCU), PRINT

SERVER (SCP), OR COMBINATION

200 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER (SCU) or PRINT

SERVER (SCP)

100 MODALITY SERVER (SCU)

100 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER (SCU)

25 PS PRINT SERVER (SCP)

Maximum Inputs

2 direct - Video or Digital.

1 network - DICOM

2 direct - Video or Digital.

1 network - DICOM

1 direct- Video or Digital

2 direct- Video or Digital

1 network- DICOM

Maximum Outputs

1 - Fiber, Copper, or Ethernet output

1 - DICOM

1 - Fiber, Copper, or Ethernet output

1-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS

The INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS used in MIMS are identified in Table

1–4

Table 1–4 INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS

Type of BOARD

Input

PRIMARY Ethernet 10/100base T

NETWORK ISOLATION (EEC countries)

VIDEO 60 INTERFACE

VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE

DIGITAL INTERFACE

Output

SECONDARY Ethernet 10/100base T

FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL)

COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL)

MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE

MIM 200

2.4 GHz

* x x x x x x

MIM 200

1 GHz

* x x x x x x x x

MIM 200

1.2 GHz

* x x x x

x x x

MIM 200

667 MHz

x x x x x x x x

MIM 100

433 MHz

* x x x

Communication

RS422 SERIAL I/F, 8-Channel

POWER/RS422 DIST., 2-Channel

RS-422, 1-Channel x x x x x

MODEM*** x x x x

* PRIMARY Ethernet connection is on the MOTHERBOARD of the COMPUTER.

*** An EXTERNAL MODEM is an option on the MIM 200 - all, 25PS, and MIM 100 1.2 GHz.

MIM 100

1.2 GHz

* x x x x

25 PS

* x x x x x

Note

For MIM’s with software V_6.1 and higher, the boards must be installed in the correct slots in order for the system to boot. See

“MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS” on Page 12–6 and “MIM 100, 1.2 GHz - BOARDS” on Page 12–7 .

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-7

SERVICE MANUAL

MODEM for Remote Service Access

To provide FEs with remote access, an optional MODEM can be included in MIMs. For MIMs manufactured with V_6.1 software, an external MODEM is used. An external MODEM is used on the MIM 100 when installed outside the U.S. or Canada.

An internal MODEM BOARD is used in the MIM 100 within the U.S. and Canada.

If 2 or more MIMS are connected on an Ethernet NETWORK, a MODEM is necessary for only one of the MIMs. To connect to a MIM without a MODEM, the FE makes a call to the MIM with the MODEM. The call can then be routed to any other MIM on the network.

User Control

Operators use either a KEYPAD or a host control CONSOLE to acquire images, select output destinations, and print the images.

There is a separate KEYPAD or host control CONSOLE for each directly-connected MODALITY.

MIMs can use 3 types of KEYPADS:

• TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - Used to control STUDY creation from a directly-connected MODALITY. This KEYPAD provides a number of features, including patient demographic acquisition for STUDY delivery to WORKSTATIONS and

ARCHIVES. Only this KEYPAD can be used to send STUDIES to DICOM store destinations.

• PRINT KEYPAD - Used to control STUDY creation from a directly-connected MODALITY for delivery to print-only destinations such as LASER PRINTERS and LASER IMAGERS.

• DISPLAY KEYPAD - Used only for setup and STUDY management for a MIM operating as a PRINT SERVER, for which there is only a DICOM interface for STUDY acquisition.

For more information on user control, see the User’s Guides for the MIMs.

HIPPA Privacy Feature

V_6.1 MIM software, includes a privacy feature that allows MIM users to comply with requirements of the Health Insurance

Portability and Accountability Act (HIPPA). When the privacy feature is enabled, keypad operators must log in with a username and password to use keypad functions that provide access to patient protected health information. The privacy features are controlled from a “security console” web page that is resident on each MIM. A customer security administrator, working on a computer connected to the same local area network as the MIM, can access the “security console” web page to setup username/ password accounts for each MIM keypad operato r.

“MIM Service Application” Software

The “MIM Service Application” can be used by FEs to:

• Enter parameters for configuration of a MIM during installation.

• Do system management functions, such as backup and restore of configuration parameters.

• Do diagnostics such as viewing logs, running tests, and monitoring operation of the system.

The “MIM Service Application” is stored on the LAPTOP COMPUTER as well as in the MIM. For more information on this and other tools for service, refer to Section 2, Tools - Hardware and Software.

Service Access

The MIM does not include a MONITOR, KEYBOARD or MOUSE. For access to the MIM for service, the FE must:

• Connect a LAPTOP COMPUTER, or

• Connect a MONITOR KIT that includes a MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE.

The MONITOR KIT connects directly to PORTS on the MIM. The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM:

• Over a dial-up serial line connection.

• Over an Ethernet network. The LAPTOP COMPUTER must contain an Ethernet interface for this connection.

• Over a dial-up telephone line using a MODEM.

1-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

When the LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected to a MIM, the FE can use it to run the “MIM Service Application.” Also, via

pcANYWHERE, the FE can use Windows FEATURES such as Windows EXPLORER, Windows EVENT VIEWER, and

Windows TASK MANAGER on the target MIM.

Note

The MONITOR KIT can also be used for service access:

• The “MIM Service Application” can be run with the MONITOR KIT because the service software is stored on the MIM as well as on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

• The MONITOR KIT can be used to watch the boot process and access the BIOS on the MIM.

When a MONITOR KIT is used, a LAPTOP COMPUTER with “SecureLink” is also required to unlock the Windows

DESKTOP.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the MIMs

The following figures provide examples of systems using MIMs.

Figure 1–3 MIMs and other Devices on the Network

Imaging

Device

Digital

Data

DICOM over Ethernet

HIS/RIS

DICOM

MIM 200 and 25 Print Server: Patient Environment

Figure 1–6

Minimum Distance between the MIM 200 or

25 Print Server and the Patient Contact Equipment

1.83 m

(6 ft)

2.5 m

(8 ft)

Warning

The following installation requirements must be met

worldwide for the MIM 200 and the 25 Print Server and their accessories; e.g., keypads, footswitches, keyboards. Refer to the illustration at the left, which identifies the patient environment.

• Minimum distance from device or accessory to Patient

Contact Equipment; e.g., Ultrasound:

– Horizontal: 1.83 m (6 ft)

– Vertical: 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor under the patient

• Contact of patient and device or accessory simultaneously by caregiver is not allowed.

• Direct electrical connection between device or accessory and Patient Contact Equipment is not allowed.

Note

The requirements are based on the EN60601-1 Standard.

1.83 m

(6 ft)

H174_0043GC

1.83 m

(6 ft)

Important

The MIM 100 can be installed within the patient environment.

MIM 200 product placement in the European Economic

Community (EEC), see “Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL

IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) Safety Requirements

Change” on Page 14–4 .

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-13

SERVICE MANUAL

History of Software

Table 1–5 Versions of Software for the MIM

Version

V_1.x

V_2.x

V_3.x

V_3.2

V_4.x

V_5.0

Features of Software

Original version, for MIM 100 only. Developed for the SPOOLER for DICOM PRINTERS market. Used the CP

DICOM Input Package to connect with the XLP, 1120, and 2180 LASER PRINTERS over the network. Used

DICOM to connect to MLP 190. Features included:

• Grayscale video image acquisition, 8-bit, 1-150 MHz

• Digital image acquisition, 8-bit

• DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU

• Autofilming control: 952, P831, KCL, Hitachi, YMS, Toshiba, and Siemens

• Image delivery to a single destination chosen from a list of all available destinations

• 10baseT-twisted pair, 10base2-thinnet, 10base5-thicknet using TCP/IP

For MIM 100 only. Developed for the Image Distribution for Diagnosis and Review market. Added:

• 12-bit digital image acquisition

• DICOM Store SCU for Study Delivery to WORKSTATIONS and ARCHIVES

• DICOM Worklist SCU for HIS/RIS Gateway access to retrieve patient demographics

• Manual patient demographics entry via TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or full KEYBOARD

• Automated patient demographics entry via HIS/RIS Gateway connection

• Delivery to multiple destinations chosen from a list of all available destinations

• Study re-delivery to any available destination

• Native 100baseT support

• Software licensing ability

Introduced MIM 50 and DPS. Developed for the DMI market and the DICOM SPOOLER for CP-Based

PRINTERS application. Supported connection to the 3600 DMI and 1200 DMI. Added:

• DICOM Basic Grayscale and Color Print SCP for receiving DICOM print jobs

• DICOM Basic Annotation Box SCP for receiving text

• Low Cost Color/Grayscale VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD

• Output to CP-Based PRINTERS via high-speed fiber connection

Introduced MIM 200. Developed for the LSI, DMI, and PACS (Cemax-ICON) business applications. Added:

• Multiple direct connect inputs with or without DICOM input

• Ability to acquire a mix of color and monochrome images on a single page

• 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM MS emulation for 952 Autofilming Superset support

• Connection database to provide user with ability to set image processing preferences within the spooler, source by source

• Ability to create separate image series within a “study” for delivery to AutoRad WORKSTATIONS

• DICOM Presentation PLUT support for interoperability with 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM

Added the ability to operate as a DPS for the 8200 LASER IMAGER, and features that can:

• Support standard multi-up page formats used by the Kodak Directview CR 800 SYSTEM for DICOM delivery.

• Rasterize page annotation tests, using a clear, sharp, true-size font onto a predefined location centered on the bottom of the page.

• Use the “MIM Service Application” for configuration of an 8200 LASER IMAGER and a networked PRINT

SERVER/8200 LASER IMAGER destination.

Adds to MIMs the features of the 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM and the 9405 PRINT SERVER, allowing a

MIM to be a replacement for these in systems that connect to Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS. This release allows connection to the 8700, 8500, 8610, 8300, 8200, and 8100 LASER IMAGERS as well as the 8800

MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, 160 LASER IMAGER and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER.

1-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

V_6.1

System Description

Version

V_5.2

V_6.0

Features of Software

Adds the features of cropping CR and DR images from Kodak and other manufacturer’s systems including FUJI

CR to provide true size printing using the MIM Print Servers.

The MIM Print Servers have expanded Kodak DryView printer destinations including the 8300, 8600, and 8610 for the 25 Print Server and 8600 for the MIM 200 Print Server.

A bar code reader option is supported on the modality servers, MIM 100 and MIM 200, to improve workflow for patient demographics.

A network isolation board has been added to the MIM 200 for the European region.

Adds Privacy-Enable features to the MIMs for those customers desiring this feature. Expected usage is in DICOM

Store and DICOM Worklist management applications. Also, the privacy feature may be used for the reprint capability of DICOM print applications. The privacy feature is optional and can be disabled.

Incorporates SecureLink authentication and encryption for service connections to the MIM.

Changes operating system on MIMs from Windows NT to Windows 2000.

V_6.0 supports only the following MIM platforms:

• MIM 100 - 433 MHz

• MIM 200 - 667 MHz

• MIM 200 1.0 GHz

• MIM 200 2.4 GHz

• Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Sever

With V_6.0, the following items no longer supported:

• MIM 50

• DPS (DICOM Print Server)

• Kodak 3600 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER

• Kodak 1200 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER

Supports VPN remote access.

Film border default setting = Image Dmax for 2180, 8900 and 160 applications.

Date annotation format is configurable according to international requirements.

Printing of patient demographics in the quotation box, at the bottom of the film, if DICOM Store is enabled.

HISRIS enhancements:

- Polling interval can be configured

- Record retention window can be configured

- Enable/disable scheduled procedure step start time

- Enable/disable Study Description

• Adds support for embedded enclosure

• Improves workflow for bar code reader by allowing use from Acquisition screen.

• Uses image capture time in DICOM study date/time and page annotation date/time.

• Supports underscore character in AE Title

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

For machine specifications, see the SITE SPECIFICATIONS document for the MIM.

Documentation

Publication

SITE

SPECIFICATIONS

QUICK REFERENCE

SERVICE MANUAL

USER GUIDES

Product

Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER 100 and 200, and Kodak PACS LINK

25 PRINT SERVER

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK

PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER with DISPLAY KEYPAD

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK

PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER 200 with PRINT KEYPAD

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK

PACS Link 25 PRINT SERVER

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK

PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER TOUCH SCREEN KEYPAD

Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER 100/200, Kodak PACS LINK 25

PRINT SERVER

Introduction to the Kodak PACS LINK

PRODUCTS

USER’S GUIDE for the DISPLAY KEYPAD - for use with KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL

IMAGE MANAGER 200 and KODAK PACS

LINK 25 Print Server

USER’S GUIDE for the PRINT KEYPAD - for use with the KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL

IMAGE MANAGER 20

USER’S GUIDE for the TOUCH SCREEN

KEYPAD - for use with the KODAK PACS LINK

MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200

Security and Privacy Features - for use with the

KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE

MANAGER and 25 Print Server

Security Policy, Customer Security Obligations and Best Practices

USER’S GUIDE ADDENDUM for SOFTWARE

VERSION 6.1 - for

KODAK PACS LINK

MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200

Pub. No.

8E9891

NOV03

8E8681

JUL03

8E8682

JUL03

8E8684

JUL03

8E8683

JUL03

8E8820

NOV03

8E8676

JUL03

8E8678

JUL03

8E8679

JUL03

8E8680

JUL03

8E9002

JUL03

8E9122

JUL03

8E9892

NOV03

Notes

LAMINATED CARD

CD for systems with V_6.1 application software.

1-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

System Description

Glossary

10/100baseT

ANSI

ASL

AUI

A CSMA/CD Ethernet LAN using Twisted Pair Wire with a baseband of either 10 Mbps or

100 Mbps. The IEEE standard for 24-gauge UTP for Ethernet.

American National Standards Institute

Adaptive Speed Leveling: ASL keeps the MODEM on-line, operating at the highest possible speed and constantly checking data integrity.

Attachment Unit Interface: A 15-pin CONNECTOR, usually with a transceiver, used with Ethernet connection.

AWG

CPOI

CSMA/CD

American Wire Gauge

Common Protocol

Common Protocol Optical Interface

Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection

DICOM

DMI

EEC

EIA

Ethernet

The Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine imaging standard.

DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER

European Economic Community

Electrical Industries Association

A passive COAXIAL CABLE that sends digital signals for a network in which the interconnections contain active elements. A LAN standard that uses a BUS topology with CSMA/CD access control. A LAN that can bridge operating systems and ignore inherent differences in data and file structures to promote reliable interconnections.

Hospital Information System / Radiology Information System

HIS/RIS

HUB

A central point or concentrator in a star topology where connections meet. Network communications flow through the HUB.

Internet Protocol

LAN

LUT

MIM

MODALITY

MODEM

Local Area Network: A combination of COMPUTER hardware and software that connects several

COMPUTERS and peripherals to provide communication and access to shared data.

Lookup Table

Medical Image Manager

An Imaging Device.

Modulator / Demodulator: A device that your COMPUTER uses to send data over TELEPHONE WIRES.

Mbps

Megabits per second

NEMA PLUG

The National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association standard 3-pronged PLUG.

PACS

PLUT

Pre-staged

Optical Interface

Picture Archiving & Communication Systems

Presentation Lookup Table

Equipment that was shipped with the MODALITY parameters installed and tested.

Protocol

Set of rules and procedures allowing COMPUTERS and peripherals to communicate.

Qualified Input The MODALITY has been field tested with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM might also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list.

RJ-11

RJ-45

4-WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS for phone lines.

8-WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS for Ethernet twisted-pair wiring.

RS-232, RS-422 EIA standards for physical and electrical specifications of a serial interface between a COMPUTER and a peripheral, for example, a MODEM.

RS-485

SCU

SCP

EIA standard for digital data connections between devices.

DICOM Service Class User.

DICOM Service Class Provider.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 1-17

SERVICE MANUAL

TCP/IP

TFT

TSC

TSK

Twisted Pair

ULUT

Unqualified

Input

UTP

WAN

Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol: Set of communication protocols developed for the

Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) to connect dissimilar systems. The TCP controls the transfer of the data, and the IP provides the routing mechanism.

Transfer Function Table

Technical Support Center

TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen.

Wiring used in telephone systems and many networks, consisting of a pair of COPPER WIRES twisted around each other to counteract the effects of noise. Commonly used instead of coaxial Ethernet cable in network applications. Usually unshielded; however, the more expensive shielded version supports greater distance with less risk of electrical interference.

User Lookup Table

The MODALITY has not been field tested.

Unshielded Twisted Pair

Wide Area Network

1-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Section 2: Tools - Hardware and Software

Introduction

This section provides information about the tools used for installation and service of the:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

The information in this section includes:

Lists of hardware and software tools

Procedures for configuring the LAPTOP COMPUTER

Procedure for installing new MIM Service Application software

Procedure for installing “SecureLink” authentication software

Procedure for installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE

Procedures for connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM

Description of “MIM Service Application” functions

Procedures for starting the “MIM Service Application”

Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE

Procedure for using a MONITOR KIT

Tools - Hardware and Software

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Tools and Accessories

Hardware Tools

10.

11.

12.

13.

Item

LAPTOP COMPUTER - Must have Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT.

SERIAL CABLE - Use to connect LAPTOP COMPUTER to MIM SERIAL PORT

10bT/100bT Ethernet BOARD - Installed in LAPTOP COMPUTER

NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE

10 baseT CABLE

Ethernet HUB: 10bT/100bT

MONITOR KIT - A MONITOR, KEYBOARD and MOUSE

Part Number

TL-5224

78-9998-2934-0

96-0000-3918-8

96-9998-2936-5

78-9998-2935-7

8E2480

ADAPTER - Used to connect MONITOR CABLE to the MIM 200, 667 MHz version. 3H9543

Y CABLE - Used to connect KEYBOARD and MOUSE of MONITOR KIT to 25 PS or MIM 100.

8E2284, TL-5371

EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE - Used to upgrade new software for MIM 100.

EXTENDER POWER CONNECTOR - Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for

MIM 100.

RIBBON CABLE - Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for MIM 100.

TELEPHONE CORD

TL-5651

TL-5652

5E2908

None

LAPTOP COMPUTER

This primary service tool includes Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT SOFTWARE, an Ethernet

BOARD, and a MODEM. The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM with a SERIAL CABLE, a

MODEM or a local area network. It is used to run the “MIM Service Application,” which is used to configure the

MIM, run diagnostics, view the logs, and do other functions.

MONITOR KIT

The MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE in this KIT connect to the MIM, and can directly access the

Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the MIM files, including the logs. The MONITOR KIT is used to configure the

MIM BIOS and to diagnose MIM database or hardware/Windows 2000 problems that the “MIM Service

Application” cannot diagnose. Because the “MIM Service Application” is stored in the MIM as well as on the

LAPTOP COMPUTER, the Service Application can be accessed directly in the MIM with the MONITOR KIT.

Software Tools

For MIM service, the following software tools must be installed on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Item

“Service LAPTOP Software for MIM-Based Products”

“MIM Service Application” Software, V_6.1 - installed on LAPTOP COMPUTER

Includes SecureLink V_1.1 Software Part Number 8E9820

pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE - installed on LAPTOP

COMPUTER and on MIM

“SecureLink V_1.0 Client” CD

FLOPPY BIOS FLASH DISK 2.0

Part Number

7E6051

8E9823

78-9998-2937-3

8E8814

7F3185

2-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Setting Up the LAPTOP COMPUTER

Setup Tasks

To prepare your laptop computer for MIM service, you must do the software installation and setup tasks listed in the following table on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Normally you will do these procedures during training or they will be part of the TCO or Field LAPTOP COMPUTER image.

You will not have to repeat them unless you change the operating system on your COMPUTER or new MIM-related software is released.

Table 2–1 LAPTOP COMPUTER Setup Tasks

Task

Install Service LAPTOP Software for MIM-Based Products

Install TCP/IP

Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for

LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98

Install Dial-Up Networking

Install “Serial Cable to NT” and Set Up the SERIAL PORT

Install “Communications cable between two computers” and Set Up the SERIAL PORT.

Create a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the

SERIAL PORT

Create “Dial-Up Networking” Icons for MODEM

Connections

Procedure

For LAPTOP

COMPUTER with

Windows 98

Not applicable

Procedure

For LAPTOP

COMPUTER with

Windows 2000

Not applicable

Procedure

For LAPTOP

COMPUTER with

Windows NT

Not applicable

Not applicable

9 Install “SecureLink” Client software

10 Request and Install a Digital Certificate for

“SecureLink”

See SecureLink documentation on Service Apps CD.

11 Install latest MIM Service Application Software

Page 2–20 Page 2–20 Page 2–20

12 Install pcAnywhere

Page 2–21

13 Create a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere

Page 2–21

Note

LAPTOP COMPUTERS with an official Kodak image will have items 1, 2 and 4 through 7 completed. Steps 9 through 11 will not be part of the image until after August 2003.

Installing the “Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM-Based Products”

This procedure applies to LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT.

For this procedure you will need the CD 7E6051. The table on

Page 2–4

lists the software components on this CD that you will install.

To install this CD, do the procedure that starts after the table on

Page 2–4 .

Important

See the table on Page 2–4 for the correct order for installing the software

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 2–2 Loading the Service Laptop Software for MIM-Based Products on the LAPTOP COMPUTER

Step

Description

Insert CD into CD-ROM DRIVE

Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC

SOFTWARE V_2.0

Install DATA ACCESS OBJECTS (DAO)

FILES V_3.0

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_A1.8

Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC

SOFTWARE V_3.0

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_2.1

Folder Containing the

SOFTWARE on CD

LapBasic

Notes

DAO V_3.00 files, Data

Link Library (DLL) Files, and

MODEM Files

See above.

Part of Laptop Basic

Software V_2.0

S_sw_a18

Laptop30

MODALITY Database, Help

Files

DAO V_3.5 files.

S_sw_2_1 MODALITY Database, Help

Files

Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC

SOFTWARE V_3.5

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.0

Laptop35

S_sw_3_0 MODALITY Database, Help

Files

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.1

Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC

SOFTWARE V_3.6

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2

Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2.1

Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE

V_1.0.4

S_sw_3_1 mim laptop basic 3.6

mimservice3.2

mimservice3.2.1

Key_104

Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE

V_1.0.5

Install KEYPAD DIRMWARE UPDATE

V_1.0.7

Key_105

Key_107

Install MIM DIGITAL FIRMWARE V_2.2

Mim_Dig

Mim_100 MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

V_6.0

MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

V_6.1

Install VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE

V_1.3

Mim_100

V150_1_3

Installation Procedure:

[1] Insert the CD into the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

The contents of the CD displays automatically.

[2] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_2.0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER:

(a) Double-click [Laptop Basic].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Next] in each of the 4 screens that display.

(d) Click [Finish].

2-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Important

In Step [3] (i), if the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message “Missing DLL,” click [OK] to complete the installation. This message does not indicate a malfunction.

[3] Install the DATA ACCESS OBJECTS (DAO) FILES V_3.0:

(a) Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.

(b) Open “Add/Remove Programs.”

(c) Click:

• [Install]

• [Next]

• [Browse]

(d) At the “C:\” prompt, double-click the [C:\] prompt and then open the folder “Program Files.”

(e) Open:

1. “KHID”

2. “DAO”

(f) Double-click [Setup.exe].

(g) Check that the “Run Installation Program” window displays “C:\Program Files\KHID\DAO\Setup.exe.”

(h) Click:

• [Finish]

• [Next]

(i) At the message “DAO Setup Complete,” click [OK].

(j) To check your work, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove Program.

Note

The screen displays “Data Access Objects (DAO) 3.0” if the software is correctly installed.

[4] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_A1.8:

(a) Double-click [S_sw_a1.8].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[5] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER:

(a) Double-click [Laptop30].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Next].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-5

SERVICE MANUAL

(d) Select Jet 3.5.

(e) Click [Next].

Important

Step f

, all boxes must be unchecked.

(f) Check that all boxes are unchecked.

(g) Click [Next].

(h) Click [OK].

2-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

[6] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_2.1:

(a) Double-click [S_sw_2.1].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

Important

Depending on what software is on the LAPTOP COMPUTER, you might have to click [Yes] 1 or more times in

Step [7] (d).

[7] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.5:

(a) Double-click [Laptop35].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Next].

(d) Click [Yes] each time the screen asks if you want to overwrite an existing file.

(e) Click [Finish].

[8] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.0:

(a) Double-click [S_sw_3_0].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[9] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.1:

(a) Double-click [S_sw_3_1].

(b) Double-click Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[10] Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_3.6:

(a) Double-click [MIM Laptop Basic 3.6].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[11] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2:

(a) Double-click [MIM Service 3.2].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[12] Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_3.2.1:

(a) Double-click [MIM Service 3.2.1].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-7

SERVICE MANUAL

[13] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.04:

(a) Double-click [key_10].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[14] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.05:

(a) Double-click [key_105].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[15] Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V_1.07:

(a) Double-click [key_107].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[16] Install the DIGITAL FIRMWARE V_2.2:

(a) Double-click [Mim_Dig].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[17] Install the MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE V_6.1:

(a) Double-click [Mim_100].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[18] Install the VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE V_1.3:

(a) Double-click [V150_1_3].

(b) Double-click [Setup].

(c) Click [Yes].

(d) Click [Finish].

[19] Remove the CD from the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[20] What operating system is on your LAPTOP COMPUTER?

Windows 98

Continue with “Installing TCP/IP -

Windows 98” on Page 2–9

Windows 2000

Advance to

“Installing TCP/IP -

Windows 2000” on Page 2–15

Windows NT

“Installing TCP/IP - Windows NT” on Page 2–17

2-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

**Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98**

Installing TCP/IP - Windows 98

[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Control Panel.

[2] Open Network.

[3] Check the “network components installed” list in the “Configuration” window:

• If TCP/IP is installed, check that “Client for Microsoft Networks” is selected in the “Primary Network Logon” window. Advance to the procedure

“Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with

Windows 98” on Page 2–9 .

• If TCP/IP is not installed, advance to

Step 4 .

[4] Click [Add].

[5] At the “Select Network Component Type” window, select Protocol.

[6] Click [Add].

[7] At the “Select Network Protocol” window, select:

• Manufacturer: Microsoft

• Network Protocol: TCP/IP

[8] Click [OK].

[9] At the “Select Device” window, click [OK].

[10] At the restart prompt, click [Yes].

[11] Continue with the next procedure.

Configuring Direct Cable Connection - for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98

[1] Right-click “My Computer”.

[2] Select “Properties”

[3] Select Device Manager>Modem>Serial Cable on COM1.

[4] Select “Properties” for “COM1”.

[5] Select “Modem”.

[6] Set “maximum speed” to 115200 and select [OK].

[7] Select Device Manager>Ports>COM1.

[8] Select “Properties” for “COM1”.

[9] Select “Port Settings”.

[10] Set “Bits/second” to 115200.

[11] Set “Flow Control” to “none”.

[12] Select [OK] twice to escape.

[13] Shut down the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Note

You must select a full “Shut down”, not “Restart”.

[14] Continue with the next procedure.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows 98

Note

TCP/IP must be installed in “Dial-Up Networking” for communication between the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications.

[2] Check the “Communications” folder for Windows 98:

• If “Dial-Up Networking” is not installed, advance to Step 3 .

• If “Dial-Up Networking” is installed, advance to

“Installing “Serial Cable to NT” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT

- Windows 98” on Page 2–11 .

[3] If “Control Panel” is not open, select Start>Control Panel.

[4] Select Add>Remove Programs.

[5] Select Windows Setup>Communications.

[6] Check that Communications has a checkmark next to it.

[7] Click [Details].

Important

In the next step, the field for “Dial-Up Networking” must be checked.

[8] Check that the field for the “Dial-Up Networking” is selected, click [OK].

[9] Click [OK].

[10] Follow the directions the screen displays for restarting the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[11] Continue with the next procedure.

2-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Installing “Serial Cable to NT” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - Windows 98

[1] Open Modems in the “Control Panel” Window.

[2] At the “Modems Properties” window under “General,” click [Add].

[3] Select “Other” and click [Next].

[4] Check “Don’t Detect my Modem” and click [Next].

[5] Click:

• [Have Disk]

• [Browse]

Important

In the following step, you might have to change the directory level from “C:\Windows” to the directory indicated.

[6] At the “Open” window, select C:\ProgamFiles\KHID\Modem.

[7] At the “Open” window, Select “mdhayes.inf” and click [OK] twice.

[8] Select the 2 nd

listing for manufacturer: “Generic Modem Drivers” and “Serial Cable to Windows NT.”

[9] Click [Next].

[10] Select “Communications Port (COM 1)” for the 9-Pin SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[11] Click [Next].

[12] When the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message “Your modem has been set up successfully,” click:

• [Finish]

• [Close]

[13] Close the “Control Panel.”

[14] Continue with the next procedure.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows 98

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.

[2] At the “Dial-Up Networking” window, double-click [Make New Connection].

[3] At the “Make a New Connection” window, type: Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose.

[4] At the “Select a Device” menu for , click [Serial Cable to Windows NT].

[5] Click [Configure].

[6] Check that the settings are correct in each of the following tabs:

• General:

– Communication Port (COM1)

– Max Speed = 115,200 baud

• Connection:

– Data bits = 8

– Parity = None

– Stop bits = 1

• Options: Display modem status

[7] Click:

• [Connection]

• [Advanced]

[8] Check both “Use Flow Control” and “Hardware (RTS/CTS)”.

[9] Click:

• [OK] twice

• [Next]

Important

• You must enter a telephone number before you can exit the “Make New Connection” window.

• The Dial-Up Networking “Connect to” window does not use this telephone number.

• Use “Tab” to advance to the next field in the menu.

[10] Type:

• 111 for the area code

• Type: 111-1111 for the telephone number

[11] Click:

• [Next]

• [Finish]

[12] Make a shortcut for “Connect to” (see the title assigned in Step

3 .):

(a) Right-click the MOUSE to select “Connect to.”

(b) Click [Create Shortcut].

(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop

[13] Close the “Dial-Up Networking” window.

[14] Continue with the next procedure.

2-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Creating Dial-Up Networking Icons for MODEM Connections - Windows 98

You should create a dial-up networking icon for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.

The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection. Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM.

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.

[2] In the “Dial-Up Networking” window, double-click [Make New Connection].

[3] Enter a name for the MIM or RAS Server to which you want to connect.

[4] Click [Configure] and accept the default values for the MODEM configuration.

[5] Click [Next].

[6] Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-13

SERVICE MANUAL

[7] Click [Next].

[8] Click [Finish].

An icon with the name of the connection you entered in

Step 3

will now appear in your Dial-Up Networking folder. You can connect to the target MIM by double-clicking on the icon.

Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can add icons for additional MODEM connections later.

[9] When you are done creating dial-up icons, advance to

“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19 .

2-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

**Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000**

Installing TCP/IP - Windows 2000

[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network and Dial-up Connections>Local Area

Connection.

[2] Click [Properties].

[3] Scroll to “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”.

[4] Is “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” checked?

No Yes

Continue with Step 5 . Advance to “Installing “Communications cable between two computers” and Setting

Up the SERIAL PORT - for Windows 2000” on Page 2–15

[5] Click [Install].

[6] Select “Client”.

[7] Click [Add].

[8] Follow the instructions to install TCP/IP.

[9] Continue with the next procedure.

Installing “Communications cable between two computers” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - for Windows 2000

[1] From the task bar: Start>Settings>Control Panel>Phone and Modem Options.

[2] Select the “Modem” tab.

[3] Click [Add].

[4] Check “Don’t Detect my modem; I will select it from list”.

[5] Click [Next].

[6] From the list, select “Communications cable between two computers”.

[7] Click [Next].

[8] Select “Selected ports”.

[9] Select “COM1”.

[10] Click [Next].

[11] Click [Finish].

[12] Select “Communications cable between two computers”.

[13] Click [Properties].

[14] Set “Maximum Port Speed” to “115200”.

[15] Click [OK].

[16] Click [OK] again to close the “Phone and Modem Options” window.

[17] Continue with the next procedure.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows 2000

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Network and Dial-Up Communications.

[2] Click [Make New Connection].

The Network Connection Wizard starts.

[3] Click [Next].

[4] Select “Connect directly to another computer” and click [Next].

[5] Select “Guest” and click [Next].

[6] Select “Communications cable between two computers (COM1)” and click [Next].

[7] Select “Only for myself” and click [Next].

[8] Enter the name Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose.

[9] Click [Finish].

An icon now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.

[10] Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created.

(a) Right-click the MOUSE on the icon you just created.

(b) Click [Create Shortcut].

(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop.

[11] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.

[12] Continue with the next procedure.

Creating “Dial-Up Networking” Icons for MODEM Connections - Windows 2000

You should create a dial-up networking icon for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.

The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection. Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM.

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Network and Dial-Up Communications.

[2] Click [Make New Connection].

The Network Connection Wizard starts.

[3] Click [Next].

[4] Select “Dial-up to private network” and click [Next].

[5] Select “Guest” and click [Next].

[6] Select the modem you have installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER and click [Next].

Note

If there is only one dial-up device in your LAPTOP COMUTER, this step may not appear.

[7] Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server.

[8] Select “Only for myself” and click [Next].

[9] Enter a name for this connection.

[10] Click [Finish].

An icon now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.

[11] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.

An icon with the name of the connection you entered in

Step 9

will now appear in your Dial-Up Networking folder. You can connect to the target MIM by double-clicking on the icon.

Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can create additional icons for

MODEM connections later.

[12] When you are done creating dial-up icons, continue with

“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19

2-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

**Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT**

Installing TCP/IP - Windows NT

[1] On the LAPTOP COMPUTER, select Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network and Dial-up Connections>Local Area

Connection.

[2] Click [Properties].

[3] Scroll to “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”.

[4] Is “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” checked?

No Yes

Continue with Step 5 . Advance to

“Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows NT” on Page 2–17

[5] Click [Install].

[6] Select “Client”.

[7] Click [Add].

[8] Follow the instructions to install TCP/IP.

[9] Continue with the next procedure.

Installing Dial-Up Networking - Windows NT

[1] At the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Dial-Up Networking.

[2] Click [Install].

[3] Continue with the next procedure.

Installing “Dial-Up Networking cable between two PCs” and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT - for

Windows NT

[1] From the task bar: Start>Settings>Control Panel

[2] Open the “Modem” icon.

[3] Click [Add].

[4] Check “Don’t Detect my modem; I will select it from list”.

[5] Click [Next].

[6] From the list, select “Dial-Up Networking Cable between 2 PCs”.

[7] Click [Next].

[8] Select “Selected ports”.

[9] Select “COM1”.

[10] Click [Next].

[11] Click [Finish].

[12] Select “Dial-Up Networking Cable between 2 PCs”.

[13] Click [Properties].

[14] Set “Maximum Port Speed” to “115200”.

[15] Click [OK].

[16] Click [Close] to close the “Modems Properties” window.

[17] Continue with the next procedure.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-17

SERVICE MANUAL

Creating a “Dial-Up Networking” Icon for the SERIAL PORT - Windows NT

[1] On the desktop, open “My Computer” and then open “Dial-Up Networking”.

[2] Select [New].

The Network Connection Wizard starts.

[3] In the “New Phone Book Entry” window:

• Enter the name Connect to MIM Products or some other name you select.

• Select “Dial-Up Networking Serial Cable Between 2 PCs.”

[4] Click [Next].

[5] At the “Server” window, select “Send my plain text password if that’s the only way to connect.”

[6] Click [Next].

[7] At the “Phone Number” window, click [Next].

[8] Click [Finish].

Your entry now appears in the “Networking and Dial-Up Connections” window with the name you entered.

[9] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.

[10] Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created.

(a) Right-click the MOUSE on the icon you just created.

(b) Click [Create Shortcut].

(c) Click [Yes] to place the shortcut on the desktop.

[11] Continue with the next procedure.

Creating “Dial-Up Networking” Entries for MODEM Connections - Windows NT

You should create a dial-up networking entry for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial-up telephone connection.

The following procedure sets up one dial-up modem connection.

[1] On the desktop, open “My Computer” and then open “Dial-Up Networking.”

[2] Select [New].

The Network Connection Wizard starts.

[3] In the “New Phone Book Entry” window:

• Enter a name for this connection.

• Select the MODEM that is installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[4] Click [Next].

[5] At the “Server” window, select “Send my plain text password if that’s the only way to connect.”

[6] Click [Next].

[7] At the “Phone Number” window, enter the telephone number for the target MIM and click [Next].

[8] Click [Finish].

Your entry now appears in a pull-down list of dial-up connection entries.

[9] Close the “Networking and Dial-up Connections” window.

Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM. You can create additional entries for

MODEM connections later.

When you are done creating dial-up entries, continue with

“Installing “SecureLink” Client Software” on Page 2–19 .

2-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Installing “SecureLink” Client Software

For information about installing the SecureLink software, see the SecureLink documentation on the Service Apps CD.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-19

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the MIM Service Application on your LAPTOP COMPUTER

[1] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[2] Insert the CD-ROM for the “MIM Service Application” software into the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Note

The name and level of the Service Application and the Software License Agreement will display.

[3] Read the Licensing Agreement and click [Yes]. The software will begin loading.

[4] When the icon displays, click:

• [File]

• [Close]

[5] When the “Setup Complete” screen displays, click [Finish]. The new MIM Service Application version will now display on the Start>Programs list of the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[6] Advance to “Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE” on Page 2–21 .

2-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

**Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE**

pcAnywhere software and installation instructions are provided on CD-ROM.

[1] Insert the CD into your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[2] Follow the installation instructions included in the package.

When installed, pcAnywhere will appear in the Windows programs list as “Symantec pcAnywhere.”

[3] Continue with the next procedure.

Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere

A pcAnywhere remote connection item is a file of the information needed to make a pcAnywhere connection from your LAPTOP

COMPUTER to a target MIM. The remote connection item appears as an icon in the pcAnywhere Manager window on your

LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[1] From the task bar: Select Start>Programs>Symantec pcAnywhere

[2] Click “Add Remote.”

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-21

SERVICE MANUAL

[3] On the “Connect Info” select “TCP\IP.”

[4] On the “Settings” tab, enter:

• IP Address: 127.0.0.1

• Login name: PLMIMService

• Password: NetServer

[5] Click [OK]

New remote connection item

[6] Change the name of the new remote connection item to “Connect MIM 6.1.”

[7] Close the pcAnywhere Manager window.

This completes Installation and setup of software on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

2-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM

There are several methods of connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM.

Connection Methods

Method

Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

COMPUTERS with Windows 98.

Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT.

Connecting to a MIM using a MODEM connection

Connecting to a MIM with a network connection

Connecting to a MIM with a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE

VPN (Virtual Private Network) Internet connection

Page number

Note

Before you can connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM by any of the above methods, you must complete the LAPTOP

COMPUTER setup tasks listed on

Page 2–3

Important

For all of these connection methods, you must know the IP Address of the MIM you wish to access.

The IP Address of the MIM is recorded in:

• A pouch on the side of the MIM.

• The “View Service Information” screen of the KEYPAD. Select Service Menu>Configuration Menu> Network

Setup>IP Address.

• For V_6.0 and above, the IP Address for a newly ghosted MIM 100, MIM 200 or PS 25 is 123.123.123.10

• The default RAS Pool IP Address is 123.123.123.200

Starting and Using “SecureLink”

As a part of each of the MIM connection methods, you must use “SecureLink” to authenticate the connection. The general procedure for connecting to a MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER with “SecureLink” is:

[1] Connect to the MIM with any of the connection methods listed in “Connection Methods” on Page 2–23 .

[2] Start the “SecureLink” client application: Start>Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

[3] Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

Note

You created this password when you requested your “SecureLink” digital certificate.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-23

SERVICE MANUAL

IP Address of the target MIM

Must be 443

Before you connect

[4] Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.

Connector Symbol - Red

Important

If the Ethernet cable at the MIM is disconnected or if an IP Address conflict exists, Windows 2000 disables the Ethernet port on the MIM. “SecureLink” will then only connect using a serial cable and the RAS Pool IP Address.

[5] Verify that the Port value is 443.

Note

It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.

[6] Click [Connect].

If the connection is successful:

• The 2 parts of the connector symbol close and the color changes to green.

• The [Connect] button changes to [Disconnect].

2-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

local

199 122

Connector Symbol - Green

After you connect

This completes the “SecureLink” authentication procedure. You can now use the MIM Service Application or pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to access the target MIM.

For more detailed connection instructions, refer to the following procedures.

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

**COMPUTERS with Windows 98**

You can use this procedure:

• To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable.

• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM.

Note

Before you can connect using this procedure, you must have completed the setup tasks listed in “Setup Tasks” on Page 2–3 on

your LAPTOP COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.

[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.

[2] Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM?

Yes

Continue with Step 3 Advance to

Step 5

[3] De-energize the MODEM.

[4] Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT.

[5] Connect the SERIAL CABLE (TL-5224) between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the

COM 1 (Service) PORT of the MIM.

[6] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.

[7] Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[8] From the TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Direct Cable Connection.

[9] Set “Connection” to “Guest.”

[10] Select “Connect.”

[11] When a connection is made, cancel the window that prompts you to share files.

A pop-up window will show that the connection is established.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-25

SERVICE MANUAL

[12] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”

(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM:

• To access the MIM connected by the serial cable, enter the RAS address or IP Address of this MIM.

• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP address of the target

MIM.

(d) Make sure the Port value is 443

(e) Click [Connect].

The connection is complete when the “SecureLink” connection symbol closes and changes from red to green.

You can then use the MIM Service Application:

• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.

• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.

2-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE - for LAPTOP

**COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT**

This procedure enables a Remote Access Service (RAS) connection to a MIM over a serial line. This is the normal mode of connection to the MIM.

You can use this procedure:

• To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable.

• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM.

Note

Before you can connect using this procedure, you must have completed the setup tasks listed in “Setup Tasks” on Page 2–3 on

your LAPTOP COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.

[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.

[2] Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM?

Yes

Continue with Step 3

Advance to Step 5

[3] De-energize the MODEM.

[4] Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT.

[5] Connect the SERIAL CABLE (TL-5224) between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the

COM 1 (Service) PORT of the MIM.

[6] Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM.

[7] Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[8] From the desktop on the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click the shortcut to “Connect to MIM Products.”

Note

This shortcut was created when you LAPTOP COMPUTER was set up for a direct serial port connection.

[9] At the “Connect to” window, type Service for the user name.

[10] Click [Accept] in the “Network Protocol Connection Result” screen.

[11] Type Service for the password.

[12] Click [Connect]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Connection Complete” screen.

[13] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”

(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM:

• To access the MIM connected by the serial cable, enter the RAS Address or IP Address of this MIM.

• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP Address of the target

MIM.

(d) Make sure the Port value is 443

(e) Click [Connect].

The connection is complete when the “SecureLink” connection symbol closes and changes from red to green.

You can then use the MIM Service Application:

• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.

• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-27

SERVICE MANUAL

Connecting to a MIM through a MODEM Connection

Use this method to connect to a MIM over the dial-up telephone network. You will need access to a wall jack for an analog telephone line. The MIM that you call must have an optional MODEM installed.

You can use this procedure:

• To access the MIM that has a MODEM.

• To establish a pass-through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the MIM with the MODEM.

Note

Before you can connect using this procedure, you must complete the setup tasks in the table on Page 2–3 , on your LAPTOP

COMPUTER. Normally, you will set up these items during MIM training.

Important

If the target MIM has an EXTERNAL MODEM, the POWER SWITCH on the MIM must have been cycled OFF and then ON after the MODEM was INSTALLED. If this has not been done, the MIM will not respond to a call from your LAPTOP

COMPUTER through the MODEM.

[1] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[2] Connect a telephone cable from the MODEM PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a telephone wall jack.

[3] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[4] At the taskbar, select:

• For Windows 98: Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.

• For Windows 2000 and Windows NT: Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Networking and Dial-up

Connections

[5] In the networking folder, double-click the icon for the MIM that you want to access.

Note

To use this procedure you must have previously set up a connection icon in your networking folder for the MIM you wish to access through a MODEM.

[6] At the “Connect to” window, type PLMIMService for the user name.

[7] Type NetServer for the password.

[8] Click [Connect]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Connected to MIM” message.

[9] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”

(a) From the task bar select: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM

• To access the MIM with the MODEM, enter the IP Address of this MIM.

• For a pass-through connection to another MIM on the same local area network, enter the IP Address of the target

MIM.

(d) Make sure the Port value is 443

(e) Click [Connect].

If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:

• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.

• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.

2-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Connecting to a MIM with a Network Connection

Use this method to connect to a MIM over the customer’s Ethernet network. You will need access to a RJ-45 jack on the network.

[1] Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access.

[2] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[3] Connect a NETWORK CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the customer network.

[4] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[5] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink.”

(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.

(d) Make sure the Port value is 443

Note

It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.

(e) Click [Connect].

If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:

• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.

• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-29

SERVICE MANUAL

Connecting to a MIM with a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE

Use this method to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE.

[1] Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access.

[2] De-energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[3] Connect a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the

NETWORK PORT on the MIM.

[4] Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[5] Authenticate the connection with “SecureLink”.

(a) From the task bar: Start >Programs>Kodak>SecureLink.

(b) Enter your “SecureLink” Password.

(c) Enter the IP Address of the target MIM.

(d) Make sure the Port value is 443

Note

It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field.

(e) Click [Connect].

If the connection is successful, the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green. You can then:

• Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM.

• Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM.

Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection

VPN is a secure method of accessing some MIM sites over the Internet.

If you require remote access to a site through the Kodak VPN, contact the Technical Support Center (TSC).

2-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Using the MIM Service Application

Service Application Functions

The “MIM Service Application” is the primary tool for installation and troubleshooting. It provides 5 main functions, which can be selected by tabs on the main screen. See the following table.

Table 2–3 “MIM Service Application” Main Functions

Function

Connect

Selections

Connect to MIM

Configure

Logs

Admin

Network Broadcasting

Disconnect

Exit

Service Tracking Information

Network

Input

Destination

HIS/RIS Gateway

Disk Management

Save Configuration

Restore Configuration

Network Profiles

SCP Services

Text Box Relocation

Logging Levels

Activity History

Error History

Error Frequency

Clear Error Frequency

Diagnostics System

Digital

Video

Delivery

Network

Change Password

Update Software

Clear Job Queues

Software Licenses

Shutdown MIM

View MODALITY Database

View Destination Database

Printing Statistics Database

Use To:

Links the MIM Service Application to the MIM to which your

LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected.

Used to enable/disable broadcast of MIM connection info. on the network. Connect/Local will not work if disabled.

Disconnect LAPTOP COMPUTER from MIM.

Exit from Service Application.

Check and, if necessary, correct service ID data for the MIM.

Set up the MIM to be a device on the network.

Set up inputs to MIM: network, digital or video.

Set up the PRINTER, storage device, or network destination.

Set up the storage WORKSTATION parameters.

Set high water mark (normally 75%) and low water mark (50%) for

MIM memory. At 75% full, MIM begins to delete oldest image files.

At 50% full MIM stops deleting. Do not change these values without consulting TSC.

Save the current MIM configuration to FLOPPY.

Restore the MIM to the last saved configuration.

Set up the network addresses for a “mobile” 25 PS.

Display connected SCUs, optimize image parameters.

Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image.

Select level of detail in logs.

Display log of MIM activity between specified dates/times.

Display log of all errors between specified dates/times.

Display list of all errors indicating numbers of each.

Clear the Error Frequency Log.

Print a test image or transfer the last stored image.

Test DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.

Test VIDEO 150, 150LC or 60 INTERFACE BOARD.

Test OUTPUT BOARD: FOPCIL or COPCIL.

Test connection to an address on network using Ping or Echo.

Change password for entering “MIM Service Application.”

Update MIM software/firmware.

All print queues and studies will be removed from the MIM.

Display list of licensed and unlicensed destinations.

Shut down the MIM.

Display list of all qualified MODALITIES.

Display list of all qualified PRINTERS and storage devices.

Display print count per DICOM or direct MODALITY input.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-31

SERVICE MANUAL

Starting the “MIM Service Application”

Important

•

Only 1 user can connect to a MIM at a time.

Important

The beginning and end IP Address for the RAS must be set up for passthrough access.

• For a PRINT SERVER see “Setting up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER” in Section 6.

• For a Modality Server see “Setting up the MODALITY SERVER for the NETWORK” in Section 7.

[1] Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the target MIM. Refer to “Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM” on Page 2–23

[2] At the Windows TASKBAR, select Start>Programs>MIM Service.

[3] Open the correct version of the “MIM Service Application.”

Note

If the application software for the MIM is V_6.1, the “MIM Service Application” will also be V_6.1.

[4] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM.

The “MIM Service Application” is now ready for use.

Quitting the Service Application

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Disconnect.

[2] Select Connect>Exit to quit the “MIM Service Application.”

Your LAPTOP COMPUTER remains connected to the MIM.

2-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Using pcAnywhere

The pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE allows your LAPTOP COMPUTER to take control of a connected MIM.

When pcAnywhere is connected to a target MIM, the Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the MIM displays on the LAPTOP

COMPUTER screen. You can then use the keyboard and mouse of the LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM.

pcAnywhere allows direct access to the Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the files on the MIM, including the logs. pcAnywhere can be used to diagnose MIM database or hardware/Windows 2000 problems that the “MIM Service Application” cannot diagnose.

The “MIM Service Application” can also be used through pcAnywhere.

The pcAnywhere software must be installed on both the MIM and the LAPTOP COMPUTER. In the MIM, pcAnywhere is defaulted to “Host,” which means that the MIM is ready to take a call from the LAPTOP COMPUTER at any time. pcAnywhere is installed in all MIMs at the factory. You must install pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER as described on

Page 2–21 .

To use pcAnywhere, first connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the target MIM using “SecureLink” and any of the connection methods described on

Page 2–23 . Then you can start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and make a pcAnywhere

connection to the target MIM.

**Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER**

To use this procedure you must have created a pcAnywhere remote connection item on your LAPTOP COMPUTER. See

“Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere” on Page 2–21 .

[1] Connect to the target MIM. Use any of the methods listed in

“Connection Methods” on Page 2–23

After you connect the “SecureLink” window will remain open on your desktop.

[2] From the TASKBAR: select Start->Programs->Symantec pcAnywhere. local

199 122

Remote connection item

SecureLink Window

[3] Click “Remotes.”

[4] Double-click “Connect MIM 6.1.”

Note

“Connect MIM” is the pcAnywhere remote connection item you created previously. See

See “Creating a Remote Connection

Item for pcAnywhere” on Page 2–21.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-33

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

Do not press Ctrl-Alt-Del on your keyboard.

Ctrl-Alt-Del Icon

[5] Click the Ctrl-Alt-Del icon.

[6] Type RNIServiceManager for the user name.

[7] Type NetServer for the password.

[8] Click [OK].

2-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Session ID

[9] Enter the “Session ID” from the “SecureLink Client” window.

Note

The “Session ID” is always displayed as 6 upper-case letters on the “SecureLink” screen.

[10] Click [OK].

The Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the target MIM displays in the pcAnywhere window.

Virtual KEYPAD

MIM Desktop

All KEYPADS connected to the MIM will be displayed as virtual KEYPADS on the MIM desktop. Icons on the lower

TASKBAR indicate the application software that is running: “MIMRoute,” “Remote Network Interface,” etc.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-35

SERVICE MANUAL

You can now use the KEYBOARD and MOUSE on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM.

From your LAPTOP COMPUTER you can:

• View the MIM VIRTUAL KEYPADS on the MIM desktop.

• Examine the MIM logs.

• Run on the MIM any of the diagnostic tools that are part of Windows 2000.

• Use Windows EXPLORER on the MIM to locate files on the MIM.

• Run the MIM Service Application on the MIM.

Buttons and Hot Keys for pcAnywhere

1 2 3 4 5

Button

1. Full Screen

2. Scaling

3. File Transfer

4. C-A-D

5. Disconnect

2-36

Function

Not applicable for MIM functions. If you enter “full screen” mode, you can exit by pressing [Alt]

[Enter]

Allows the server’s TASKBAR to display, but may result in poor resolution.

Used to transfer MIM files to the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Starts the Ctrl-Alt-Delete function at the MIM. Also must be selected before the pcAnywhere session is ended.

Used to disconnect and end a pcAnywhere remote control session.

NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

Important

• If the pcAnywhere screen is not set up correctly because of any of the following problems, you might have to disconnect and recall the “Host” Server:

– The pcAnywhere upper TASKBAR does not appear.

– The screen display appears to be out of sync.

– The desktop icons do not appear.

• For best results, check that the screen resolution for both the “Host” Server and Remote Server match.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 2-37

SERVICE MANUAL

Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM

A MONITOR KIT, Part No. 96-000-5311-4, is necessary for setting up the BIOS in a MIM. The MONITOR KIT can also be used to connect with the “MIM Service Application” stored in the MIM to do service functions.

Before you can log on to the MIM with the MONITOR KIT, you must establish a “SecureLink” connection to the MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER. This is a security measure to prevent unauthorized access to the MIM using the MONITOR KIT.

MIM 200 - 667 MHz

MIM 200 - 1 GHz

MIM 200 1.2 GHz

1 2 3 4 5 6

MOUSE

KEYPAD

MONITOR

MOUSE

KEYPAD

MONITOR

Slot

KEYPAD MOUSE

ADAPTER/

MONITOR

MIM 100 1.2 GHz

PACS LINK 25

MOUSE

KEYPAD

MONITOR

Y - CABLE to

MOUSE and KEYPAD

MIM 100 433 MHz

BACK

PANEL

Y - CABLE to MOUSE and KEYPAD

H180_3024ECA

H180_3024EC

MONITOR

TOP VIEW (COVER REMOVED)

2-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Tools - Hardware and Software

[1] Connect the MONITOR KIT to the MIM:

(a) Remove the COVER on the MIM, if necessary.

(b) Connect the CABLES from the MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE to the MIM.

Note

To connect the CABLE of the MONITOR to the MIM 200, 667 MHz, use ADAPTER PLUG (3H9543). To connect the

KEYBOARD and MOUSE to the 25 PS and MIM 100, use Y CABLE (TL5371). The 25 PS and MIM 100 have a single

CONNECTOR for KEYBOARD and MOUSE.

[2] Energize the MIM and the MONITOR.

[3] Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM using SecureLink.

Note

Use any of the connection methods described in “Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM” on Page 2–23 .

[4] At the MONITOR KIT KEYBOARD, press Ctrl-Alt-Del.

[5] Enter:

• Username: RNIServiceManager

• Password: NetServer

[6] Click [OK].

8E8820 – NOV 2003

MONITOR local

199 122

LAPTOP COMPUTER

2-39

SERVICE MANUAL

[7] Enter the “Session ID” from the “SecureLink Client” screen on your LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Note

The “Session ID” is always displayed as 6 upper-case letters on the “SecureLink” screen.

[8] Click [OK].

The MIM Windows DESKTOP will display on the monitor.

[9] Using the MONITOR KIT you now can:

(a) Start the MIM Service Application on the MIM.

(b) Open Windows EXPLORER to examine logs.

(c) Use Windows DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS.

[10] To start the “MIM Service Application:”

(a) On the MIM desktop, Double-click the Shortcut named mimdui

(b) At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM.

2-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Section 3: Installing the Hardware

Introduction

This section provides instructions for installing and setting up the following MIMs:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

The instructions include information for connecting MIM PRINT SERVERS to the following LASER IMAGERS:

• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER

Installation of the hardware includes:

Unpacking

Installing a 25 PS

Connecting System CABLES

Terminating Video Inputs

Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM

Installing an EXTERNAL MODEM

Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD

Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD

Network Isolation for the MIM 200 - European

MIM 200 System Setup Per IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements

Connecting the KEYPAD Directly to the MODALITY

Preparing for Application of Power

Energizing the MIM

De-energizing the MIM

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Important

The site must be prepared for installation of the MIM as described in the SITE SPECIFICATIONS for the MIM. Before installation of the MIM, the customer must provide IP and RAS Addresses for all equipment to be installed. Also, before the

MIM can be installed, the customer must install:

• All NETWORK CABLES

• All FIBER OPTIC CABLES

• All 42 m (138 ft.) and 45 m (148 ft.) CABLES

• Space on wall for installation of MIM, if necessary. This is optional for MIM 100 and PS 25.

• Analog telephone line for a MODEM

Unpacking System Components

[1] Check with the customer where to install the MIM and move the equipment to this area.

[2] Check the CARTON for damage.

Caution

The SHOCK DETECTOR on the carton for the MIM changes from clear to red if damage occurs during shipment.

[3] Check that:

• The SHOCK DETECTOR is clear.

• The PRODUCT LABEL on the CARTON indicates that the EQUIPMENT is correct for the site.

[4] Unpack the CARTON holding the MIM.

[5] Unpack the other CARTONS and check the contents. They should include:

• A LASER IMAGER, if the MIM will be used as a PRINT SERVER. See the LASER IMAGER SERVICE MANUAL for installation instructions.

• An UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS). See the installation instructions sent with the UPS.

(A UPS is optional with the MIM 100.)

See “Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER.” for special

instructions for the 25 PS.

• CABLES for connecting the MIM to the MODALITY, KEYPAD, HOST CONTROLLER (if used), network and/or

PRINTER.

• CD-ROMS with the current version of the MIM Application Software.

• User Guides

3-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Installing the 25 PS

The 25 Print Server is the print server for new orders as it can be used in a hospital, clinic, or mobile unit and has a number of mounting options.

Note

When installing connect the following components:

UPS to the POWER STRIP

25 Print Server to the UPS

UPS COMMUNICATIONS CABLE to COM 2 on the 25 Print Server

In this configuration, the power switch on the power strip will be used to safely power up and down the 25 Print Server.

Important

If the 25 Print Server is installed without using the power strip or the UPS communications cable, it is necessary to exit the system software using the Display Keypad, before the 25 Print Server can be safely powered down.

Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER

If the 25 PS will be used with an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER, it should be installed on the back of the LASER IMAGER. If

it will be used with an 8500 or 8700 LASER IMAGER, it will normally be installed on a wall. See “Installing the 25 PS on a

Wall.”

Instructions for installing an 8100 LASER IMAGER in a MOBILE VAN are included in the MOBILE STRAP KIT

96-0000-4045-9. This KIT is used to fasten the LASER IMAGER to the wall of the MOBILE VAN. Before attaching the LASER

IMAGER, install the 25 PS on the BACK PANEL of the LASER IMAGER and install the UPS on the floor of the VAN as instructed in this procedure.

Figure 3–1 Installing a 25 PS on an 8100 LASER IMAGER

SCREW

Holes

25 PS

[1] Install the 25 PS on the 8100 LASER IMAGER using 5 mm SCREWS. The CONNECTORS of the 25 PS must be adjacent to the CONNECTORS of the LASER IMAGER.

Note

Installation on the 8200 LASER IMAGER is similar, except the 25 PS is installed below the FILTER on the BACK PANEL.

[2] Tighten the SCREWS.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the 25 PS on a Wall

Installation of the 25 PS on a wall is an option for any site. ANCHOR FASTENERS and SCREWS (4 each) for installation on

DRYWALL are included with the 25 PS. If the 25 PS will be installed on another type of wall, the customer must supply

FASTENERS.

Figure 3–2 Installing the 25 PS on a Wall

64.6 cm

(25.4 in.)

5 cm

(2 in.)

203.2 cm

(80 in.)

COMM

CABLE to UPS

15.2 cm

(6 in.)

15.2 cm

(6 in.)

1.63 m

(64 in.)

POWER

CORD to UPS

39.3 cm

(15.5 in.)

5 cm

(2 in.)

H180_0075HCA

H180_0075HC

[1] Drill pilot holes and install ANCHOR FASTENERS in the wall as shown in the figure.

[2] Fasten the 25 PS to the wall with No.5 SCREWS (4).

3-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the 25 PS on a Shelf

Depth

Height

Width

H180_0106ACA

H180_0106AC

Important

The side brackets should be removed to expose 4 rubber feet.

2 Side Brackets

Installing the Hardware

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing the UPS for the 25 PS

For installation in a MOBILE VAN, the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN with the MOUNTING KIT sent with the

25 PS.

Use the instructions included with the UPS and this procedure. If the 25 PS will be installed in a MOBILE VAN, the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN between the LASER IMAGER and the front wall of the VAN. A UPS HOLDDOWN KIT is available for this purpose.

Figure 3–3 Installing the UPS for the 25 PS on a Mobile Van Floor

Strap Ay end must be oriented as shown

3.8 cm

(1.5 in.)

Van Wall

15.2 cm

(6 in.)

UPS

LASER

IMAGER

16.5 cm

(6.5 in.)

1/4 inch

Lag Screw

Location (4)

Midpoint of

LASER IMAGER

H180_0071BCA

H180_0071BC

[1] Remove the 2 STRAP ASSEMBLIES from the UPS HOLDDOWN KIT.

[2] Mark positions for 4 holes to be drilled on the floor of the VAN. The front 2 holes must be 3.8 cm

(1.5 in.) from the front wall.

[3] Drill pilot holes in the floor to a depth of 3.8 cm (1.5 in.). 4 LAG SCREWS (1/4 - 1.5 in.) will be used to attach the STRAP

ASSEMBLIES to the floor.

[4] Open the LATCH on each STRAP ASSEMBLY and remove slack from the adjustment STRAP.

[5] Place the STRAP ASSEMBLIES, with the metal ends pointing in the same direction, before installing them. See the figure.

[6] Fasten the metal ends of the STRAP ASSEMBLIES to the floor with the 4 LAG SCREWS. Use a large and a small FLAT

WASHER with each LAG SCREW.

[7] Place the UPS in the STRAPS. Tighten and lock the STRAPS.

To install CABLES between the MIM and other components of the system:

• For CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS, see

Table 3–1 .

• For CABLES for PRINT SERVERS, see

Table 3–2 .

• For diagrams relating to video termination, RS-232/RS-422 conversion and other CABLE conversion, see

Table 3–3

• To locate COM PORTS on all MIMS, see

Table 3–4 .

Table 3–1 CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS

MODALITY SERVER/KEYPAD See Figure:

MIM 200, 2.4 GHz

3–7

MIM 200, 1.2 GHz

MIM 200, 1 GHz

3–6

3–5

MIM 200, 667 MHz

MIM 100

TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD

3–4

3–8

3–10

3-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Table 3–2 CABLES for PRINT SERVERS

PRINT SERVER

MIM 200

25 PS

Connection Type

Ethernet

LASER IMAGER

8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS

Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-

INPUT MANAGER, 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

Fiber Optic (CPOI)

Copper (COPCIL)

2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS

8100, 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS, 8500 and

8700 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD

MIM 200 1.2 GHz Ethernet 8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS

Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS, 8800 MULTI-

INPUT MANAGER, 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

Fiber Optic (CPOI) 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS

Copper (COPCIL) 8100, 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS, 8500 and

8700 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD

8200 LASER IMAGER

Ethernet

Fiber Optic (FOPCIL) 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/PLUS

Copper (COPCIL) 8100 LASER IMAGER, 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS/

STANDARD

See Figure:

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3–3 Other CABLES

CABLE Diagram

MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode

MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode

MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode

MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS422 Serial Control

MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS232 Converted to RS422 Serial

Control

Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS

Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS

Terminating the Video Input for a MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD

Video Imaging Device with 1 Video Output to the MONITOR (Non-terminating Passthrough)

See Figure:

Table 3–4 Functions of COM PORTS for MIMs

PORT Function

COM

Service

RS232

MIM 200

Figure 3–7 ,

Figure 3–5 ,

Figure 3–4

BACK PANEL

(Not Used)

MIM 200-1.2 GHz

Figure 3–6

BACK PANEL

(Not Used)

MIM 100

Figure 3–8

MIM 100-1.2 GHz

Figure 3–6

BACK PANEL BACK PANEL

(Not Used)

25 PS

Figure 3–21

BACK PANEL

(UPS Comm.)

MODEM Slot 2

Autofilm SERIAL CABLE

N/A

KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N/A

Autofilm SERIAL CABLE N/A

BACK PANEL N/A

Not Used N/A

KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N/A Not Used

Autofilm 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used

KEYPAD 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used

Autofilm 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Not Used

KEYPAD 1 Slot 1

* For 25 PS, the MODEM PORT is COM 4.

Slot 1 Not Used

* Not used

* MODEM BD.

BACK PANEL

Not Used

N/A Not Used

SERIAL CABLE Not Used

Slot 2 Not Used

3-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–4 MIM 200, 667 MHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES

AUTO- FILMING

CABLE

(See Note below.)

J8 Sync Out

J7 Blue Out

J6 Green Out

J5 Red Out

J4 Sync In

J3 Blue In

J2 Green In

J1 Red In

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

Com 8

Com 9

Com 7

Com 6

Com 5

Com 4

COLOR VIDEO

CABLE

(8 m or 20 m)

COM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

SWITCH

115/230 V

COLOR

VIDEO

INTERFACE

J8 Csync Out

J7 Csync In

J6 Video3 Out

J5 Video3 In

75 ohm

COAX

CABLE

(10 m or 45 m)

J4 Video2 Out

J3 Video2 In

J2 Video1 Out

J1 Video1 In

VIDEO

ADAPTER

CABLE

VIDEO

INTERFACE

RS - 485 DATA

CABLE (10 m or

45 m)

RS - 485

ADAPTER

CABLE

(1 m)

H180_0058ECA

H180_0058EC

DIGITAL

ADAPTER

CABLE

To UPS

1 2 3 4 5 6

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

COM 1

SERVICE and EXT.

MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

SLOT

BOARD

Ethernet

10/100 BASE T

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

VIDEO INTERFACE (as needed)

DIGITAL INTERFACE (as needed)

BLANK

TELCO

(RJ-11)

PHONE

(optional)

SERVICE

Note

For information on Autofilming CABLES:

• See

Figure 3–23

for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.

• See Figures 3–25

through 3–28

for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–5 MIM 200, 1 GHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES

TO DIGITAL MODALITY

TO VIDEO MODALITY

RS - 485 DATA

CABLE (10 m or

45 m)

75 ohm

COAX CABLE

(10 m or 45 m)

RS - 485

ADAPTER

CABLE

(1 m)

DIGITAL

ADAPTER

CABLE

VIDEO

INTERFACE

VIDEO

ADAPTER

CABLE

COLOR

VIDEO

INTERFACE

COLOR

VIDEO

CABLE

(8 m or 20 M)

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

AUTOFILMING

To UPS

CABLE (See

Note below.)

COM 1

SERVICE and EXT.

MODEM

TELCO (RJ11)

PHONE (optional)

Ethernet

CABLE

COM 2

(not used)

COM PORT

ADAPTER

CABLE

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

Slot

H180_0057ECA

H180_0057EC-b

Note

For information on Autofilming CABLES:

• See

Figure 3–23 for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.

• See Figures 3–25

through 3–28

for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.

SLOT

BOARD

VIDEO ADAPTER

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO

INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO

BLANK

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–6 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES

TO DIGITAL MODALITY

TO VIDEO MODALITY

RS - 485 DATA

CABLE (10 m or

45 m)

75 ohm

COAX CABLE

(10 m or 45 m)

RS - 485

ADAPTER

CABLE

(1 m)

DIGITAL

ADAPTER

CABLE

VIDEO

INTERFACE

VIDEO

ADAPTER

CABLE

COLOR

VIDEO

INTERFACE

COLOR

VIDEO

CABLE

(2 m)

AUTO FILMING

INPUT 2 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 2

To UPS

CABLE PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

COM 1

COM 2

COM 11 - TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 1

SLOT

COM 10 - AUTO FILMING

INPUT 1

BOARD

BRACKET - 422

BOARD - 422

INPUT 1: VIDEO or DIGITAL iNPUT 2: VIDEO or DIGITAL

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

H180_3025ECA

H180_3025EC

Note

For information on Autofilming CABLES:

• See

Figure 3–23

for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY.

• See Figures 3–25

through 3–28

for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY.

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–7 MIM 200, 2.4 GHz - MODALITY SERVER CABLES

TO DIGITAL MODALITY

RS - 485 DATA

CABLE (10 m or

45 m)

RS - 485

ADAPTER

CABLE

(1 m)

DIGITAL

ADAPTER

CABLE

VIDEO

INTERFACE

TO VIDEO MODALITY

75 ohm

COAX CABLE

(10 m or 45 m)

VIDEO

ADAPTER

CABLE

COLOR

VIDEO

INTERFACE

COLOR

VIDEO

CABLE

(8 m or 20 M)

AUTO FILMING

INPUT 2

TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 2

To UPS

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

COM PORT

ADAPTER

CABLE

H180_0114ECA

H180_0114EC-b

Ethernet

CABLE

TELCO (RJ11)

PHONE (optional)

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

Slot

COM 10 - AUTO FILMING INPUT 1

COM 11

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 1

SLOT

BOARD

CABLE, COM 10, 11

INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION

SERIAL INTERFACE

INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO

VGA PORT

INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO

BLANK

3-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–8 MIM 100 - MODALITY SERVER CABLES

SLOT

TO DIGITAL MODALITY

To UPS

(optional)

RS-485

KEYPAD AUTO FILM or

IN OUT

VIDEO

C/H SYNC V SYNC

KEYPAD AUTO FILM

MODEM/

SERVICE COM 2

TO VIDEO MODALITY

UTP

MODEM

Label: Serial Number and Service Code

LP FIBER

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

ON/OFF

SWITCH

BOARD

3.3 VDC REGULATOR

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

DIGITAL or VIDEO

BLANK

VGA ADAPTER

ISOLATION/INTERNAL MODEM blue green

AUTOFILMING CABLE

MIM 100 NR (433 MHz)

with

MICRO INDUSTRIES CPU

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

H180_0088DCA

H180_0088DC

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-13

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–9 MIM 100 1.2 GHz WITH 2 MODALITY CONNECTIONS

COM 10 AUTO FILMING

INPUT 1

COM 11

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

COM 2

To UPS

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

COM 1

AUTO FILMING

INPUT 2

2 3 4

TOUCHSCREEN

OR PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 2

SLOT

BOARD

ISOLATION

BOARD - 422

INPUT 1: VIDEO or DIGITAL

INPUT 2: VIDEO or DIGITAL

COM PORT

ADAPTER

CABLE

H180_3026DCA

H180_3026DC

3-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 3–10 TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD - CABLES

FORMAT=

COPIES=

END

EXAM

MAIN

Cable

Barcode Reader

Mini-Keypad

Keyboard

Footswitch

Installing the Hardware

H180_0117HCA

H180_0117HC

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–11 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE

CUSTOMER NETWORK

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

Com 9

POWER

SWITCH

To UPS

Slot

1 2 3 4 5 6

SLOT

BOARD

Ethernet 10/100 BASE T

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

Ethernet

10/100 BASE T

Ethernet

CROSSOVER

CABLE - 3 m

8200 or 160

LASER IMAGER or 3600 DMI

(10 m available)

TELCO

(RJ11)

COM 1

SERVICE and EXT.

MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

MIM 200 - 667 MHz

PHONE

(optional)

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

Ethernet CABLE COM 1 SERVICE and EXT. MODEM

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COM 2

(not used)

TELCO

(RJ11)

Slot

MIM 200 - 1 GHz

SLOT

BOARD

VIDEO ADAPTER

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO

INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO

Ethernet

10/100 BASE T

PHONE

(optional)

8200 or 160

LASER IMAGER

Ethernet

CROSSOVER

CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)

H180_0061ECA

H180_0061EC-b

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 3–12 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE

Installing the Hardware

Ethernet

CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COM 1

Com 8

Com 9

Com 7

Com 6

Com 5

Com 4

COM 2

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

COM 10 - AUTO FILMING

INPUT 1

COM 11 - TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 1

SLOT

BOARD

BRACKET - 422

BOARD - 422

EMPTY

Ethernet

10/100 BASE T

Ethernet

8200 or 160

LASER IMAGER or 3600 DMI

CROSSOVER

CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)

H180_3027HCA

H180_3027HC

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see “Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-17

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–13 MIM 200 X205, 2.4 GHz - COMBO BOX, Dual Input, Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

COM 1 SERVICE and EXT. MODEM

AUTO FILMING INPUT 1

Ethernet

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

H180_0108HCA

H180_0108HC-b

CABLE

COM 10

COM 11

TOUCH SCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 1

COM 2

(not used)

AUTO

FILMING

INPUT 2

SLOT

BOARD

TOUCH SCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 2

TELCO

(RJ11)

Slot

PHONE

(optional)

MIM 200 - X205, 2.4 GHz

CABLE, COM 10, 11

INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION

SERIAL INTERFACE

INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO

VGA PORT

INPUT 2 DIGITAL OR VIDEO

Ethernet 10/100 BASE T

Ethernet

8200 or 160

LASER IMAGER

CROSSOVER

CABLE - 3 m (10 m available)

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–14 MIM 200, X200, 1 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (FOPCIL) OUTPUT CABLES

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

Com 9

POWER

CUSTOMER NETWORK

SWITCH

Slot

To UPS

2 3 4 5 6

SLOT

BOARD

Ethernet

10/100 BASE T

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

FOPCIL

IMAGE

8500/8700

LASER IMAGER/

PLUS, 969 HQ

CONTROL

LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI-

FIBER

OPTIC

INPUT MANAGER

CABLES - 3 m (10, 30, 60 m available)

PHONE

(optional)

TELCO

(RJ11)

COM 1

SERVICE and EXT.

MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

MIM 200 - 667 MHz

To UPS

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

TELCO

(RJ11)

PHONE

(optional)

SLOT BOARD

VIDEO ADAPTER

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

FOPCIL

Slot

MIM 200 - 1 GHz

8500/8700

IMAGE

LASER IMAGER/

PLUS, 969 HQ

LASER IMAGER

CONTROL or 8800 MULTI-

FIBER

OPTIC

INPUT MANAGER

CABLES - 3 m (10, 30, 60 m available)

H180_0062ECA

H180_0062EC-b

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see “Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-19

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–15 MIM 200, 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (FOPCIL) OUTPUT CABLES

H180_3028DCA

H180_3028DC

Ethernet CABLE

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

COM 1

COM 2

COM 10

COM 11

SLOT

BOARD

BRACKET - 422

BOARD - 422

EMPTY

FOPCIL

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

IMAGE

CONTROL

8500/8700

LASER IMAGER/

PLUS, 969 HQ

LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI-

INPUT MANAGER

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–16 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (CPOI) OUTPUT CABLE

Ethernet

CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

POWER

SWITCH

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

SLOT

BOARD

Ethernet 10/100 BASE T

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

OPTICAL INTERFACE

Com 9

Slot

1 2 3 4 5

2180 or 1120

LASER PRINTER

FIBER

OPTIC

CABLE - 8 m

TELCO

(RJ11)

CP0I OPTICAL

INTERFACE BOARD

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

MIM 200 - 667 MHz

To UPS

PHONE

(optional)

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COM 2

(not used)

TELCO

(RJ11)

MIM 200 - 1 GHz

SLOT

Slot

PHONE

(optional)

FIBER

OPTIC

CABLE - 8 m

BOARD

VIDEO ADAPTER

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

OPTICAL INTERFACE

2180 or 1120

LASER PRINTER

CP0I OPTICAL

INTERFACE BOARD

H180_0063ECA

H180_0063EC-b

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see “Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-21

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–17 MIM 200 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, FIBER OPTIC (CPOI) OUTPUT CABLE

Ethernet CABLE

To UPS

CUSTOMER NETWORK

COM 1

COM 2

H180_3029HCA

H180_3029HC

COM 10

COM11 - DISPLAY

KEYPAD

MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

SLOT

FIBER

OPTIC

CABLE - 8 m

BOARD

BRACKET - 422

BOARD - 422

EMPTY

OPTICAL INTERFACE

2180 or 1120

LASER PRINTER

CP0I OPTICAL

INTERFACE BOARD

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–18 MIM 200 - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

Com 9

POWER

SWITCH

CUSTOMER NETWORK

To UPS

Slot

1 2 3 4 5 6

SLOT

BOARD

Ethernet 10/100 BASE T

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

NONE

COPCIL

3 m

COPPER

CABLE

IMAGE PORT

8100, 8300, 8610

LASER IMAGER or

8500/8700 LASER

IMAGER/STANDARD

TELCO

(RJ11)

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

MIM 200 - 667 MHz

COM PORT

PHONE

(optional)

Extensions of 10, 30 or

60 m COPPER CABLE are available.

To UPS

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

Ethernet CABLE

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COM 2

(not used)

TELCO

(RJ11)

PHONE

(optional)

SLOT

BOARD

VIDEO ADAPTER

INTERNAL MODEM

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

COPCIL

Slot

IMAGE PORT

3 m

COPPER

Y CABLE

MIM 200 - 1 GHz

COM PORT

Extensions of 10, 30 or

60 m COPPER CABLE are available.

8100, 8300, 8610

LASER IMAGER or

8500/8700 LASER

IMAGER/STANDARD

H180_0064ECA

H180_0064EC-b

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see “Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-23

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–19 MIM 200 1.2 GHz - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE

Ethernet

CABLE

To UPS

CUSTOMER NETWORK

COM 10

COM 11

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

COM 1

COM 2

SLOT

BOARD

BRACKET - 422

BOARD - 422

EMPTY

COPCIL

H180_3030DCA

H180_3030DC

MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

IMAGE PORT

3 m

COPPER

Y CABLE

8100, 8300, 8610

LASER IMAGER or

8500/8700 LASER

IMAGER/STANDARD

COM PORT

Extensions of 10, 30 or

60 m COPPER CABLE are available.

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–20 MIM 200 X205, 2.4 GHz - PRINT SERVER, COPPER (COPCIL) OUTPUT CABLE

To UPS

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

COM 10

COM 11

DISPLAY

KEYPAD

Ethernet CABLE

SLOT BOARD

H180_0111HCA

H180_0111HC-b

COM 2

(not used)

Slot

3 m

COPPER

Y CABLE

CABLE COM 10, 11

INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION

SERIAL INTERFACE

BLANK

VGA PORT

BLANK

COPCIL

IMAGE PORT

8100, 8300, 8600, 8610

LASER IMAGER or

8500/8700 LASER

IMAGER/STANDARD

MIM 200 - X205, 2.4 GHz

COM PORT

Extensions of 10, 30 or

60 m COPPER CABLE are available.

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see “Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-25

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–21 CABLES for 25 PS

TO DIGITAL MODALITY

RS - 485 DATA

CABLE (10 m or

45 m)

RS - 485

ADAPTER

CABLE

(1 m)

DIGITAL

ADAPTER

CABLE

VIDEO

INTERFACE

TO VIDEO MODALITY

75 ohm

COAX CABLE

(10 m or 45 m)

VIDEO

ADAPTER

CABLE

COLOR

VIDEO

INTERFACE

COLOR

VIDEO

CABLE

(8 m or 20 M)

AUTO FILMING

INPUT 2

TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 2

To UPS

COM 1

SERVICE and

EXT. MODEM

COM 2

(not used)

COM PORT

ADAPTER

CABLE

COM 10 - AUTO FILMING INPUT 1

COM 11

TOUCHSCREEN or

PRINT KEYPAD

INPUT 1

Ethernet

CABLE

TELCO (RJ11)

PHONE (optional)

CUSTOMER

NETWORK

Slot

SLOT

BOARD

CABLE, COM 10, 11

INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION

SERIAL INTERFACE

INPUT 1: DIGITAL or VIDEO

VGA PORT

INPUT 2: DIGITAL or VIDEO

BLANK

H180_0114ECA

H180_0114EC-b

Note

For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM, see

“Installing an EXTERNALMODEM” on

Page 3 – 38

3-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–22 MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode

Keypad Cable

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Imaging

Device

Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)

Video Input Pkg.

Keypad

MIM 100 or MIM 200

H180_0007BCA

H180_0007BC

Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

Important

The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.

Table 3–5 CABLES for Video Mode with KEYPAD

CABLE Description

VIDEO CABLE (75 ohm Coax)

VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for the

MIM 200

RGB VIDEO CABLE. Used in place of

VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO

ADAPTER CABLE in RGB installations. Not shown in figure.

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the KEYPAD CABLE to a length of

either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft).

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.

KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM

PORT ADAPTER CABLE

Length

Catalog

Number

10 m (32.8 ft.) 839 7747

45 m (150 ft.)

20.3 cm (8 in.)

160 9791

---

Notes

---

The CONNECTORS are not installed.

Included with the MIM 200 only.

8 m (26 ft.)

20 m (65 ft.)

2 m (6.6 ft.)

---

Used with MIM 100 only.

3 m (9.8 ft.) --Included with the KEYPAD.

12 m (39.4 ft.) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One end

42 m (137.8 ft.) 848 3539 is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled

“Rear Panel.”

1 m (3.2 ft.) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered COMM

PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS. Even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.

Table 3–6 Color Key for CONNECTORS in Figures 3-16 and 3-17

Symbol

Label

None

Blue

Green

Red

Yellow

White

Notes

Video

KEYPAD CABLES are blue.

Autofilming CABLES are green.

The RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE supplied by Kodak has red labels.

The end of the RS-485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-27

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–23 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode

Imaging

Device

Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

Keypad Cable

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Keypad

Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)

Video Input Pkg.

H180_0008BCA

H180_0008BC

RS-232 Serial

Control Cable

R Y

Serial Control Cable

RS-422 (DB15)

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

RS-232 / RS-422

Conversion Kit

This view shows RS-232 converted to RS-422.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

Important

The CABLES in both figures are for each installed channel of a MIM 200. A MIM 200 can have 2 input devices.

Imaging

Device

H180_0021BCA

H180_0021BC

Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

Keypad Cable

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Keypad

Video Cable (75 ohm Coax)

Adapter Cable

(DB25 to DB15)

Y Y

Serial Control Cable

RS-422 (DB15)

952

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

This view shows an RS-422 connection.

Video Input Pkg.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

3-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Table 3–7 CABLES for Video Autofilming

CABLE Description

VIDEO CABLE (75 ohm Coax)

VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for

MIM 200

RGB VIDEO CABLE. Used in place of

VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO ADAPTER

CABLE in RGB installations. Not shown in the figure.

RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit

RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

RS-422 (DB15)

ADAPTER CABLE (DB25 to DB15)

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the

KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either

15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.

KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

Length

Catalog

Number Notes

10 m (32.8 ft) 839 7747 ---

45 m (147.6 ft) 160 9791 The CONNECTORS are not installed.

20.3 cm (8 in.) --Included with the MIM 200.

8 m (26 ft.)

20 m (65 ft.)

2 m (6.6 ft.)

---

Use with MIM 100 only.

---

1.8 m (6 ft)

121 2018

---

DB25 to DB15

Included with Conversion Kit.

10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end

45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.

1.52 m (5 ft)

3 m (9.8 ft)

835 9689

---

RS-422

Included with the KEYPAD.

12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One

42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel”.

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered

COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for

KEYPADS and even numbered

CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-29

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–24 MODALITY SERVERS: KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode

Imaging

Device

RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)

Keypad Cable

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Digital Input Pkg.

Keypad

MIM 100 or MIM 200

H180_0009BCA

H180_0009BC

RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

Important

The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.

Table 3–8 CABLES for Digital Mode with KEYPAD

CABLE Description

RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)

Length

Catalog

Number Notes

10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed.Both ends are male.F/F gender changer included.

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.

RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the

MIM 200

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the

KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.

KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

3 m (9.8 ft) --Included with the KEYPAD.

12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels.

42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539

One end is labeled “Keypad” and the other is labeled “Rear Panel.”

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered

COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for

KEYPADS and even numbered

CONNECTORS are for Autofilming.

Table 3–9 Color Key for the CONNECTORS in Figures 3-18 through 3-21.

Symbol Label

K BlacK

Notes

The CONNECTOR of the RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE that connects to the MIM 200 has a black label.

Blue

Green

---

Red

White

Yellow

Only the RS-232 CABLE that is supplied by Kodak has red labels.

The end of the RS-485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label.

---

3-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–25 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS-422 Serial Control

Keypad

Keypad Cable

Imaging

Device

H180_0010BCA

H180_0010BC

RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

B B

RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)

RS-422 Serial Control

Cable (DB37)

Y Y

RS-422 Adapter Cable

(DB37 to DB15)

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Digital Input Pkg.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Important

The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.

Table 3–10 CABLES for Digital Autofilming: RS-422 Serial Control

CABLE Description

RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)

Length

Catalog

Number Notes

10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.

RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the MIM

200

RS-422 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

(DB37)

RS-422 ADAPTER CABLE

(DB37 to DB15)

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the

KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure.

KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

10 m (32.8 ft) 842 9391 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

45 m (147.6 ft) 197 0862 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

1 m (3.2 ft) 814 5732 ---

3 m (9.8 ft) --Included with the KEYPAD.

12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One

42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.”

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered

COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for

KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-31

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–26 MODALITY SERVERS: Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode - RS-232 Converted to RS-422 Serial

Control

Imaging

Device

H180_0011BCA

H180_0011BC

Keypad Cable

RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

K W

RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)

RS-232 Serial

Control Cable

R Y

Serial Control Cable

RS-422 (DB15)

RS-232 / RS-422

Conversion Kit

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Digital Input Pkg.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

Keypad

Important

The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.

Table 3–11 CABLES for Digital Autofilming: RS-232 Converted to RS-422

CABLE Description

RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)

Length

Catalog

Number Notes

10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed. Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.

RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the

MIM 200

RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit

RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

RS-422 (DB15)

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the

KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in figure.

KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

---

1.8 m (6 ft)

121 2018

---

DB25 to DB15

Included with Conversion Kit.

10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end

45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.

3 m (9.8 ft)

1 m (3.2 ft)

---

12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One

42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.”

---

Included with the KEYPAD.

Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered

COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for

KEYPADS and even numbered

CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.

3-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Figure 3–27 Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS

Keypad

Keypad Cable

Imaging

Device

RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

RS-485 Data Cable (DB37)

RS-232

(DB25)

Fiber optics

RS-232

(DB25)

RS-422

(DB15)

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Digital Input Pkg.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

Hirschmann

Connectors

RS-232 / RS-422

Conversion Kit

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

H180_0012BCA

H180_0012BC

Figure 3–28 Siemens Imaging Device: FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS

Keypad

Keypad Cable

Imaging

Device

H180_0013BCA

H180_0013BC

RS-485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200

W K

RS-485

(DB37)

Fiber optics

RS-232

(DB25)

RS-485

(DB37)

RS-232

(DB25)

RS-422

(DB15)

Connectors

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

RS-232 / RS-422

Conversion Kit

Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only

Digital Input Pkg.

MIM 100 or MIM 200

Important

For Figures

3–27 and 3–28

: The CABLES are for each installed channel of a MIM 200.

Important

For Figures

3–27 and 3–28

: The RS-232/RS-422 CONVERTER 2E4415 contains 2 DIP SWITCHES. To locate the DIP

SWITCHES, remove the COVER from the side of the CONVERTER that has the hole for access.

• For the Hirschmann CONNECTORS, the 2 DIP SWITCHES must be set to the ON position. This provides power to the

Hirschmann CONNECTOR.

• For some versions of the Pritzel CONNECTOR, the 2 DIP SWITCHES might have to be reset.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-33

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 3–12 Siemens Imaging Device: CABLES for Digital Autofilming

CABLE Description

RS-485 DATA CABLE (DB37)

RS-485 ADAPTER CABLE for the

MIM 200

RS-232/RS-422 Conversion Kit

RS-232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

SERIAL CONTROL CABLE

RS-422 (DB15)

KEYPAD CABLE

KEYPAD Extension CABLE: Extends the

KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 m (49.2 ft) or 45 m (147.6 ft). The

KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in the figure.

FIBER OPTIC CABLE

Hirschmann CONNECTOR

---

1.8 m (6 ft)

121 2018 DB25 to DB15

--Included with Conversion Kit.

10 m (32.8 ft) 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM; Female end

45 m (147.6 ft) 860 3599 connects to MODALITY.

3 m (9.8 ft) ---

---

Included with the KEYPAD.

12 m (39.4 ft) 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels. One

42 m (137.8 ft) 848 3539 end is labeled “Keypad” and the other end is labeled “Rear Panel.” variable

---

Pritzel CONNECTOR

KEYPAD and Autofilming COM PORT

ADAPTER CABLE

Length

Catalog

Number Notes

10 m (32.8 ft) 197 2330 Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

45 m (147.6 ft) 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed.Both ends are male. F/F gender changer included.

1 m (3.2 ft) --Included with the MIM 200.

---

1 m (3.2 ft)

---

Not provided by Kodak.

Not provided by Kodak. Use for Fiber optics less than or equal to 30 m (98.4 ft) in length.

Not provided by Kodak. Use for Fiber optics greater than 30 m (98.4 ft) in length.

Included with the MIM 200. Odd numbered

COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for

KEYPADS and even numbered

CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections.

3-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 3–29 Terminating the Video Input for MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD

Installing the Hardware

Uninstalled MIM50 or SPOOLER/Video

Video 60 Board

Video In

Video Out

Terminated Video (Non-Passthrough)

Out

MONITOR MODALITY

Single Video Output

MONITOR MODALITY

TERMINATOR

Out

MONITOR

MODALITY

Multiple Video Output

MODALITY

MONITOR

Non-terminated Video (Passthrough)

1 and

Out

MONITOR

MODALITY

H174_0065CC

Important

The diagrams indicate various states of the VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD depending on the set up of the MODALITY and

MONITOR at the site.

• A: Uninstalled MIM 200.

• B: Installed MIM 200 with terminated video (non-passthrough) for a MODALITY with a single video output. The

“Terminate Video Input” box for monochrome or boxes for RGB must be enabled before you select [Set Parameters]

in the “Video Board Setup” menu. A 75 Ohm TERMINATOR, which is not shipped with the product, must be installed when the MIM is de-energized.

– B

: Energized

– B

: De-energized

• C: Installed MIM 200 with terminated video (non-passthrough) for a MODALITY with multiple video outputs:

– C

: Energized

– C

: De-energized

• D: Installed MIM 200 with non-terminated video (passthrough): Same for both the energized and de-energized states.

– D 1 : Energized

– D

: De-energized

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-35

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 3–30 Video Imaging Device with One Video Output to MONITOR (Non-terminated Passthrough)

IMAGING

DEVICE

MIM

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

IMAGING DEVICE

MONITOR

75 OHMS

H156_0114BC

Important

A MIM with a VIDEO 150 or 150LC INTERFACE BOARD must be energized if the MODALITY is in use (active passthrough video) and provides only one video output connection to the MONITOR.

3-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM

To install a telephone connection for a MIM that includes an INTERNAL MODEM, connect to a telephone line as indicated in

Figure 3–31 .

Figure 3–31 Connect MODEM BOARD to Telephone Line

Computer

(rear)

Telephone

Drop Cable

Line Jack

(Analog Line)

Do not connect to PHONE Jack

MIM - Rear

TELCO

Jack

Modem

MODEM BOARD

r9410-13L

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-37

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing an EXTERNALMODEM

An optional EXTERNAL MODEM can be connected to a MIM 200 or 25 PS for remote service access. An analog dial-up telephone line is reqired for the MODEM.

The MODEM requires an AC power source of 100 to 240 volts, 50 or 60 Hz.

Parts

The EXTERNAL MODEM supplied with MIM products includeds the following items:

• MODEM

• POWER ADAPTER

• SERIAL CABLE

• TELEPHONE CORD

• INSTRUCTION BOOK

Procedure

[1] Check that the MIM is de-energized.

Figure 3–32 CONFIGURATION SWITCHES

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

MODEM - Bottom

CONFIGURATION

SWITCHES

[2] Set the CONFIGURATION SWITCHES on the bottom of MODEM:

• SWITCHES 3 and 8: ON

• All other SWITCHES: OFF

3-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 3–33 MODEM CABLES

POWER SOURCE

100 - 240 vOLTS,

50 or 60 Hz

To COM1 CONNECTOR on MIM 200 or 25PS

SERIAL

CABLE

Ferrite

CLAMP

Installing the Hardware

JACK for ANALOG

TELEPHONE LINE

TELEPHONE

CORD

MODEM

POWER

SWITCH

PHONE JACK

LINE JACK

POWER

ADAPTER

[3] Connect the cables for the MODEM as shown in Figure 3–33 on Page 3 – 39 .

Note

The TELEPHONE CORD connects to the LINE JACK on the MODEM. Do not connect to the TELEPHONE JACK on the

MODEM.

[4] Install the ferrite CLAMP on the SERIAL CABLE near the end with the 25-pin CONNECTOR.

[5] Energize the MODEM.

Note

No MIM software coniguration is required to use the external MODEM. Powering up the MIM with the MODEM installed activates remote service access.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-39

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD

This procedure installs a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT (FOPCIL) BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the FOPCIL

BOARD to a local PRINTER.

Tools/Parts

• FOPCIL BOARD

• FIBER OPTIC CABLES (2)

Procedure

1. Check that the MIM is de-energized.

2. Insert the FOPCIL BOARD into:

• Slot 6 on the back of the MIM 200 <SLOT ON NEW MIM???>

• The INTERFACE BOARD located at the top center of the 25 PS

3. Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in

Figure 3–34 .

• On INPUT MODULES for 969 LASER IMAGERS or 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGERS, the control CABLES can be connected to either the COM 1 or COM 2 PORT.

• On the FIBER INTERFACE BOARD for the 8500/8700 LASER IMAGER/PLUS, the image CABLES can be connected to USER PORT 0 or 1. The control CABLES can be connected to COM PORT 0 or 1.

Figure 3–34 FIBER OPTIC CABLES

Image

Port

PACS Link 9410

MIM

B-Lead

A-Lead

B-Lead

FOPCIL

BOARD

Board

Image

Control

B-Lead

A-Lead

B-Lead

Input Module or

Fiber Interface

Board

Image

Port

Note:

The above drawing does not show the exact position of the Image and

COM connectors.

Refer to the laser imager service manual for location of COM and

Image connectors.

3-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Installing a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD

This procedure installs a COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the COPCIL BOARD to a local LASER IMAGER.

Tools/Parts

• COPCIL BOARD

• Y CABLE

Procedure

1. De-energize the MIM, if necessary.

2. Insert the COPCIL BOARD into:

• Slot 6 in the MIM 200 <SLOT ON NEW MIM??>

• The INTERFACE BOARD location at the top center of the 25 PS

3. Connect CABLES as indicated in

Figure 3–35 . If the local PRINTER is an 8500/8700 LASER IMAGER/STANDARD, you

can connect the “Y” CABLE to either image PORT and to either COM PORT.

Figure 3–35 COPPER OUTPUT CABLES

Digital Image

Port

Image

Computer

MIM

COPCIL

Control

Port

Cable (3 Meters)

74-0500-5864-8

9-PIN CONNECTOR

9-Pin

Connector

Note:

The above drawing does not show the exact position of the Image and

COM connectors.

Refer to the laser imager service manual for location of COM and

Image connectors.

9410-62L

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-41

SERVICE MANUAL

Network Isolation for MIM 200: 667 MHz, 1 MHz, 1.2 GHz, 2.4 MHz - European

DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD

ISOLATION

CABLE

ETHERNET

CABLE

H180_0104GCA

H180_0104GC

**Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections**

1. Connect the ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT and to INPUT #1 (J1) on the DUAL NETWORK

ISOLATION BOARD.

2. Connect the ETHERNET CABLE to the OUTPUT #1 (J2) on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the

CUSTOMER NETWORK.

**Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections**

To isolate the connection for the direct-connect network connection using a CROSSOVER NETWORK CABLE to a LASER

IMAGER.

1. Connect the second ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT PORT and to INPUT PORT #2 (J3) on the

DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD.

2. Connect the CROSSOVER ETHERNET CABLE to OUTPUT #2 (J4) on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the INPUT NETWORK PORT of the LASER IMAGER.

Patient Environment Connection

The MIM 200 can be installed within the patient environment in the European Economic Community (EEC) if it is connected per “Setup Diagram” on Page 14 – 5 . For additional information see “Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1

Requirements” on Page 14 – 4 and “Non-Compliancy with IEC 60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 Requirements” on Page 14 – 6

3-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Installing the Hardware

Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY

A SWITCH on the MODALITY can be connected to a KEYPAD in place of a FOOTSWITCH, as shown in the drawing below.

An optional CABLE is available for this connection. This connection applies to MODALITY SERVERS only.

CABLE Catalog Number: 1836253

CABLE Description: Four meter IMAGE ACQUISITION CABLE

The CABLE has a KEYPAD CONNECTOR on one end and a BNC coaxial PLUG on the other end. It is designed to connect to a MODALITY that has SWITCH CONTACTS wired to a BNC coaxial JACK. A BNC-to-RCA adapter is supplied with the

CABLE for connecting to a MODALITY with an RCA-type coaxial JACK.

Important

This CABLE provides a reference voltage for isolated SWITCH CONTACTS at the MODALITY.

Important

After installing this modification, the MODALITY SERVER must be set up so that the MODALITY Store function can be done from the KEYPAD. See Section 7.

BNC CONNECTOR

(JACK) on MODALITY

FOOTSWITCH

CONNECTOR

CABLE

Length: 4 Meters

BNC CONNECTOR

(PLUG) on CABLE

MODALITY

8E8820 –NOV 2003 3-43

SERVICE MANUAL

Preparing to Apply Power

Setting Up the MIM

Set up the MIM for application of power as follows:

• The MIM 200 (667 MHz) and the 25 PS have a 115/230 V POWER SWITCH, located on the rear of the MIM adjacent to the POWER CONNECTOR. Set this SWITCH to the correct position for the site.

Note

Later MIM 200s (2.4 GHz and 1 GHz) and the MIM 100 do not include the 115/230 V SWITCH. They include “Autosensing” circuits which automatically set the MIM for the correct source voltage.

• The MIM 200 and the 25 PS are provided with a UPS, for either 115 or 230 V operation. A UPS is optional with the MIM

100. Connect the UPS to the MIM and to source power using the instructions included with the UPS.

Important

The UPS for the 25 PS is a “smart” unit. It includes software which allows communication with the 25 PS. If a source power failure occurs, the UPS provides battery backup for the 25 PS for about 1 minute (adjustable) to allow the 25 PS to shut down its processes in order. Then, about 7 or 8 seconds later, the UPS turns off.

De-energizing the MIM

[1] Shut down the MIM either from the KEYPAD or from the “MIM Service Application.” The MIM 200 and 25 PS will power off automatically.

[2] For the MIM 100: De-energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH off after the KEYPAD indicates that it is safe to do so. The power light will turn off.

Energizing the MIM

After all components have been set up and CABLES have been connected, apply power to the system:

[1] Energize the UPS, if the system includes one.

[2] For all MIMS except the 25 PS:

(a) Energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH on. The power light will turn on.

(b) If the MIM has been set up, check the KEYPAD for a “Ready” indication. Start-up to “Ready” can take up to 6 minutes.

[3] For the 25 PS: Energize the 25 PS by pressing the POWER SWITCH on the POWER STRIP to the on position.

3-44 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

Section 4: Upgrading MIM Software

Introduction

The procedures in this section are primarily “upgrade” procedures. These procedures upgrade the MIM to the latest software level. Normally, except for the procedure “Saving and Restoring the Configuration”, it is not necessary to perform these procedures when you install a new system, because new systems are delivered with the latest software and software licenses.

The procedures include:

“Saving and Restoring the System Set Up.”

“Setting Up the BIOS.”

“Installing New MIM Application Software (Ghosting).”

“Enabling Software Licenses.”

“Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE.”

Saving and Restoring the System Set Up

Saving and Restoring Using the “MIM Service Application”

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.

[2] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select Connect>Connect to MIM

[3] Make sure the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.

[4] Select Configuration from the menu, and:

• To back up the configuration, select Save Configuration.

• To restore the configuration, select Restore Configuration.

[5] Click [OK].

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD

[1] At the KEYPAD main menu, press [Menu].

[2] Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to the “Service” menu.

[3] Press the [Menu].

[4] Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to the “Configuration” menu.

[5] Press the [Menu] key.

[6] Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.

[7] To save the configuration for the system:

• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Backup Config.

• Press the [Menu] key.

• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Run Backup. The following messages will display:

“BACKUP STATUS: IN PROGRESS.” Then “BACKUP STATUS: Operation completed.”

• To exit, press the [Menu] key.

[8] To restore the configuration for the system:

• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Restore Config.

• Press the [Menu] key. “Enter Password” will display.

• Use the [Up Arrow] and [Down Arrow] keys to enter the password: SVC, letter by letter. Press the [Menu] key after entering each letter. The [Menu] key acts like the Spacebar on a KEYBOARD.

• Press the [Menu] key until the screen displays “Exit.”

• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Exit.

• Press the [Menu] key.

• Press the [Down Arrow] key until > points to Confirm Restore.

• Press the [Menu] key to begin the system restore.

Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD

[1] Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.

[2] Press [MAIN MENU] on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD.

[3] Press [SERVICE].

[4] Press [BACKUP CONFIGURATION]. The screen will display “DISKETTE OK.”

[5] Press [EXECUTE BACKUP]. The screen will display “BACKUP STATUS: IN PROGRESS,” then “BACKUP STATUS:

COMPLETED.”

[6] Press [RETURN].

Note

The Restore function is not available on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD.

4-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

Setting Up the BIOS

BIOS Setup Functions

Version 6.1 software is on a CD-ROM for all MIMs. For all MIMs using software stored on CD-ROM, the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD-ROM. MIM 200s below serial number 100600 were set up to boot from the HDD DRIVE. Before V_6.1 software can be loaded on any MIM 200 below serial number 100600, the BIOS for the MIM must be set up to boot from CD-

ROM. For many of these MIMs, the BIOS was changed when Version 5.0 or 5.2 MIM software was loaded. However, if you are upgrading a MIM200 in this group that currently has a software level below Version 5.0, check the Boot options in the BIOS and change if necessary.

The following pages provide procedures for setting up the BIOS in the following devices:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200) - Both 1 GHz and 667 MHz

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

Note

Setting up the BIOS to boot from CD-ROM normally involves only changing the settings that select the first and second boot devices. CD-ROM must be selected to be the first boot device and the HARD DRIVE to be the second. But if the BIOS is corrupt, all settings will have to be checked.

Table 4–1 shows general options that are available during BIOS setup.

Table 4–1 BIOS Setup Functions

Main

Menu Use to:

Set up and change the main options; for example, time, date, FLOPPY DRIVE, HARD

DRIVE, CD-ROM.

Advanced

Security

Exit

Sub Menu

Change advanced features, for example: “peripheral configuration” and “advanced chipset configuration”.

Enter a password to limit access to the system.

Save or discard changes.

Use to:

Hard Drive Configuration Set up the HARD DRIVE.

Boot options

Peripheral Configuration

Modify options for the system to boot up, for example: boot sequence.

Modify options for the SERIAL PORTS, the PARALLEL PORT, and the HARD

DRIVE interfaces.

Modify options for memory and system buses.

Advanced Chipset

Configuration

Power Management

Configuration

Plug-and-Play

Configuration

Modify options for Advanced Power Management (APM).

Modify options for the system’s plug-and play features.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 2.4 GHz

This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the

BIOS is corrupted.

[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.

[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the

MONITOR screen.

[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings in Table

4–2 .

Table 4–2 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu

Step Under Menu Item

1 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup / USB Support Disabled

2 Devices and I/O Ports / Serial Port Setup / Serial Port B Address 3F8

3 Devices and I/O Ports / Serial Port Setup / Serial Port A Address 2F8

4 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Wake On LAN Disabled

5 Start Options / Startup Sequence / First Startup Device

6 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Second Startup Device

Select “CD ROM”

Select “Hard Disk 0”

Action

7 Start Options / Startup Sequence/ Third Startup Device

8 Start Options / Startup Sequence / Fourth Startup Device

9 Start Options / Fast Power On Self Test

10 Start Options / Memory Test

11 Start Options / Boot Fail Count

12 Advanced Setup / CPU Frequency / Single Processor MP Table

13 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.

[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.

4-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 and MIM 200 - 1.2 GHz

This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the

BIOS is corrupted.

[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.

[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the

MONITOR screen.

[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings in Table

4–3 .

Table 4–3 Custom Settings from Factory Defaults

Step Under Menu Item

1 General Configuration / Select / - 1st Boot Device

2 General Configuration / Select / 2nd Boot Device

3 General Configuration / Select / 3rd Boot Device

4 General Configuration / Select / 4th Boot Device

5 Peripherals / Serial port 2

6 Power Management

[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.

[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.

DROM

HDD-2

DISABLED

COM2

“Disable”

Action

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 1 GHz

This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD-ROM. The following procedure is provided in case the

BIOS is corrupted.

[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.

[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the

MONITOR screen.

[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings in Table 4–4.

Table 4–4 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu

Step Under Menu Item

1 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup

2 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup

3 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup

4 Devices and I/O Ports / Video Setup

5 Devices and I/O Ports /

6 Devices and I/O Ports /

7 Devices and I/O Ports /

8 Start Options / Startup Sequence

9 Start Options / Startup Sequence

10 Start Options / Startup Sequence

11 Advanced Setup/Chipset Feature

12 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

13 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

14 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

15 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

16 Power Management Setup / Automatic Power On

Action

Disable “OnChip USB”

Enable “OnChip Primary IDE” - default setting

Enable “OnChip Secondary IDE” - default setting

Set “Primary Video Slot” to AGP

Disable “OnChip sound”

Disable “Sound Blaster”

Disable “Midi Port (200-207H)”

Select “CD ROM” to be the First Boot Device -default setting

Select “Hard Disk 0” to be the Second Boot Device

Disable “Third Boot Device”

Set “AGP Aperture Size” to 64

Disable “Wake On PCIPME”

Disable “Wake on LAN/Ring”

Disable “Wake on RTC Alarm”

Set “Power Button Mode” to Instant-Off - default setting

Set “Power On After Power Loss” to Last State

[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.

[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.

4-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 - 667 MHz

Important

Starting with V_5.0 application software, the MIM includes a “soft off” feature for all versions of MIM 200. All before serial number 103650 must have a BIOS change before being upgraded to Version 5.0. Otherwise the system will reboot on an

attempted shutdown. See the necessary BIOS change in Step 12 of Table 4–5.

Important

Do this procedure before installing new application software in any MIM 200 with a serial number below 100600, to enable booting from the CD-ROM.

[1] Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.

[5] Energize the MIM, and access the “Configuration/Setup Utility” menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the

MONITOR screen.

[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings from in Table 4–5.

Table 4–5 Settings on the “Configuration/Setup Utility” Menu

Step Under Menu Item

1 Devices and I/O Ports

2 Devices and I/O Ports / USB Setup

3 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup /

IDE Hard Disk Drive 0

4 Devices and I/O Ports / IDE Drives Setup /

IDE Hard Disk Drive 0

5 Devices and I/O Ports / Audio Setup

6 Start Options / Startup Sequence

7 Start Options / Startup Sequence

8 Start Options / Startup Sequence

9 Start Options / Startup Sequence

10 Start Options

11 Start Options

12 Power Management / APM

13 Power Management / APM

14 Power Management / Automatic Power On /

Wake on LAN

Action

Select “Not Installed” for Mouse

Disable “USB Keyboard/ Mouse Support”

Select “High Performance” for IDE Performance - default setting

Disable “IDE Read Prefetch” - default setting

Disable “Audio Support”

Select “CD ROM” for the Primary/First Startup Device

Select “Hard Disk 0” for the Primary/Second Startup Device

Select “Disabled” for the Automatic Power On Startup Sequence

Select “Primary” for the Error Startup Sequence

Enable “Keyboardless Operation Mode”

Disable “Network Boot F12 Option”

Enable “APM BIOS Mode”

Disable “Automatic Hardware Power Management”

Disable “Wake on LAN”

[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.

[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the BIOS for the 25 PS

This version of MIM comes from the factory set to boot from the CD-ROM. Use this procedure if the BIOS is corrupted.

[1] Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM from the “MIM Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM. See “Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM” in Section 2.

[5] Energize the MIM, and access the BIOS “Configuration/Setup Utility Menu” by pressing F2 when prompted on the

MONITOR screen.

[6] Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items, and install the settings from Table 4–6 for the Menu Items

indicated. Disregard all other Menu Items.

Table 4–6 Settings on the “BIOS Setup” Menu

Step

Under Menu Item

Advanced/ I/O Device Configuration

Boot/Floppy Check

Boot / Boot Device Priority

[7] After entering new settings, save and exit the BIOS setup.

[8] Reboot. Then re-ghost the MIM.

Action

Enable “Serial Port A”

Enable “Serial Port B”

Enable “Serial Port C”

Disable “Serial Port D”

Disable “Parallel Port A”

Disable “Parallel Port B”

Disable

Select:

“1. ATAPI CD-ROM Drive”

“2. Hard Drive”

“3. Removable Devices”

“4. Network Boot”

“5. MBA UNDI”

4-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100

For Software V_6.1, the capability exists to load software from a CD using the external CD-ROM DRIVE KIT Tool. For some

MIMs the BIOS settings must be changed so that the MIM can boot from the CD-ROM DRIVE:

• Each MIM 100 with a serial number below 111345 contains a 120 MHZ mother board and may not be upgraded to V_6.0 and above software.

• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 111345 or above contains a 433 MHz motherboard and may be upgraded to V_6.0 and above software. Additional memory and BIOS configuration may be required.

• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 112779 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration but may need additional memory.

• Each MIM 100 with a serial number 113045 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration and memory.

The following procedure is provided if the BIOS becomes corrupted.

[1] Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[2] Shut down the MIM application from the “Service Application” or the KEYPAD.

[3] De-energize the MIM.

[4] Connect the MONITOR, KEYBOARD, and MOUSE to the equipment.

[5] Energize the MIM.

[6] When the MIM is booting, press [F2] to enter the BIOS Setup.

Table 4–7 Settings on the “PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility” Menu

Step Under Menu Item

Advanced

Advanced / I/O Device Configuration

Advanced

Advanced / Advanced Chipset Control

Boot

Main / Secondary Master

Boot / Boot Device Priority

Action

Disable “Legacy USB Support”

Disable “Parallel Port”

Select “Other” for Large Disk Access Mode

Select “4MB” for Graphics Aperture

Disable “QuickBoot Mode”

Select Type: [Auto]

Change the Boot Device Priority to:

• [ATAPI CD-ROM Drive]

• [HARD DRIVE]

• [Diskette Drive]

• [Network Boot]

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Loading New MIM Application Software (Ghosting)

It may be necessary to re-load the MIM application software (ghost) if:

• A software upgrade is necessary

• The HARD DRIVE is corrupt

• The current software is corrupt

Important

This ghosting procedure for MIM 100 requires the use of the external CD-ROM DRIVE KIT TL-Tools.

[1] Is the equipment a MIM 100?

Yes

a. Remove the COVER.

b. Connect the EXTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE, TL-5651, to the equipment:

1. TOOL RIBBON CABLE, 5E2908 - CONNECTOR P1 to IDE 1 on CPU

BOARD.

2. TOOL RIBBON CABLE, 5E2908 - CONNECTOR P3 to CD-ROM

DRIVE.

3. EXENDER POWER CONNECTOR, TL-5652, to power on CD-ROM

DRIVE and to the INTERNAL CONNECTOR, MOD-J2 POWER

CONNECTION.

c. Continue with Step 2 .

Continue with

Step 2

[2] Energize the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.

[3] Save the MIM configuration to FLOPPY DISKETTE.

[4] If necessary, set up the BIOS.

Note

Setting up the BIOS may be necessary for early MIMs that loaded software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER. Because current version software is provided on CD-ROM, the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD-ROM.

[5] If the LAPTOP COMPUTER does not contain the latest version of the “MIM Service Application”, load the latest version.

[6] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and connect to the “MIM Service Application”.

4-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

[7] Select Admin>Software Licenses and note the software licenses that are enabled. These will have to be re-enabled after ghosting.

[8] Load the CD-ROM with the new application software into the CD-ROM DRIVE of the MIM.

[9] De-energize, then energize the MIM. The software will begin to load automatically.

[10] Wait 6 minutes for ghosting to complete:

• For the MIM 100 and MIM 200: The MIM will beep 3 times if ghosting was successful. If the MIM beeps 10 times, ghosting has failed.

• For the 25 PS: The CD and HDD LED’s will stop blinking after 6 minutes, indicating that ghosting has completed successfully.

[11] Remove the CD-ROM from the MIM. De-energize the MIM, then energize it.

Important

After a MIM has been ghosted, the first reboot will take about 4 minutes. CHKDSK will be performed once. Then the MIM will reboot and do CHDSK 3 more times before reaching the Ready state. The length of this process is not an indication of a bad Hard

Drive. You should allow at least 7 minutes before assuming that the boot process has failed. When in doubt, connect a

MONITOR to the MIM and watch the boot process.

Note

After V_6.0 and above ghosting is completed, the MIMs and RAS Server will have the following default IP Addresses:

• MIM 100, MIM 200, PS 25: 123.123.123.10

• RAS Server: Begin IP Address: 123.123.123.200, End IP Address: 123.123.123.201

[12] After successfully ghosting, re-enable the correct software licenses. See “Enabling Software Licenses” on Page 4 – 12 .

[13] Restore the cofiguration from the backup disk or manually configure the system. See the instructions in Section 6 (for

PRINT SERVERS) or Section 7 (for MODALITY SERVERS).

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Enabling Software Licenses

Software licensing is necessary when:

• The customer purchases additional features for an existing system:

– DICOM Store Output - Enabling connection to WORKSTATIONS and archives

– HIS/RIS Connection - Enabling connection to a HIS/RIS Gateway

• You reload software (ghosting) in a MIM set up with destinations other than PRINTERS.

Important

Using the LAPTOP COMPUTER, the FE must set the Software License to “On” state for each Feature before the MIM can add a DICOM Store Destination, or HIS/RIS GATEWAY.

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application”.

Important

After ghosting, all V_6.0 and above MIMs (MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS) have the default IP Address 123.123.123.10

[2] From the “MIM Service Application” screen, select Admin>Software Licenses.

4-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

[3] From the “Software Licenses” screen, record the “Site Code” information.

[4] Call the TSC and provide:

• The Site Code of the MIM

• The K# of the MIM

Note

The TSC will provide the necessary Site Key information.

[5] On the “Software Licenses” screen, enter the Site Key provided by the TSC.

[6] Click [Update].

[7] On the “Software Licenses” screen, check that the correct Features are “On.”

[8] Select [Cancel] to exit the screen.

Note

After the correct software licenses are enabled, the MIM is ready to be set up.

Upgrading MIM Software

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-13

SERVICE MANUAL

Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE

Important

Use this procedure to install software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM to upgrade MIM DEVICE DRIVERS or install new FIRMWARE in any of the following MIM components:

• VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

• DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD

• KEYPAD

Note

The software which will be transferred in the following procedure was loaded onto the LAPTOP COMPUTER when it was set up. See “Installing the LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM Products” in Section 2.

[1] Connect:

• LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM through Dial-Up Networking. See Section 2.

• “MIM Service Application” to the MIM. See Section 2.

[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Admin>Update Software.

[3] Select the correct version and then select [OK].

Important

The MIM displays the “File Transfer Progress” window. Do not abort the procedure, which takes 5 to 10 minutes to complete.

• Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the “File Transfer Progress” completion. During this time the “File Transfer Progress” window might indicate 1 to 2 minutes of no activity.

• After 5 to 10 minutes the COMPUTER displays the message “The MIM Software has been successfully updated. The MIM system will be restarted.” At this time, the software automatically restarts the MIM.

• Do not select “Reconnect” when the COMPUTER displays the “Re-establish Connection” window. Wait another 2 minutes for the KEYPAD to display the “Acquisition” window.

[4] Wait until the KEYPAD displays the “Acquisition” window. Then use the KEYPAD to select:

• Main Menu

• Service

• View System Information

[5] At the KEYPAD, check that the correct software version displays.

[6] Close any open windows on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

4-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

MIM Privacy Feature

Introduction

MIM software includes a Privacy feature that customers can use to prevent unauthorized users of a MIM from printing or storing patient data. This feature allows customers to comply with the U. S. Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act

(HIPPA). The Customer can elect to either enable or disable the privacy feature. If the Privacy feature is enabled, the customer can set up user accounts that will require each authorized MIM operator to login at a KEYPAD with a user name and password.

The Privacy feature is controlled from a “Security Administrator Console” (SA Console).The SA Console is a web page on the

MIM that can be accessed using Internet Explorer or other web browser. Each MIM unit has its own Security Administrator web page. Usually the customer's Security Administrator will access the SA Console web page from a COMPUTER connected on the same local area network as the target MIM. The SA Console contains several screens that are used to comfigure the Privacy functions to meet customer requirements.

A service provider can also access the Security Administrator Console using a MONITOR KIT if he/she has Security

Administrator privledges. Starting Internet Explorer from the MIM desktop automatically brings up the Security Administrator

Console web page.

For detailed instructions for using the Security Adminitrator Console, see User Guide 8E9002 - Security and Privacy Features for the MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS.

Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER

To open the SA Console for a MIM you must have:

• A remote COMPUTER connected on the same network a the target MIM

• The IP Address of the target MIM

• The username and password for the SA Console on the target MIM

On a newly installed V_6.0 and above MIM or after V_6.0 and above software is installed on a MIM, the username and password are:

• Username: SA

• Password: PASSWORD

Access Procedure

[1] Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER or other COMPUTER with Internet Explorer to the same network as the MIM.

[2] Launch Internet Explorer.

[3] In the Internet Explorer Address Box, type in http://aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd where aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd is the IP Address of the

MIM.

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-15

SERVICE MANUAL

[4] Type in the username and password.

Note

Initially the username is SA and the password is password.

[5] Click [Logon].

The SA Console Welcome Screen appears. You can use the menu buttons on the left side of the Welcome screen to move to the other screens within the SA Console.

Menu

Buttons

Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature

[1] Click [Device]

4-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Upgrading MIM Software

[2] Click [PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER V_ 6.1].

[3] Click the “Enabled” or “Disabled” button.

[4] Click [Save].

[5] Click [Logout].

8E8820 –NOV 2003 4-17

SERVICE MANUAL

[6] Restart the MIM for the change to take effect.

4-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting up a PRINTER

Section 5: Setting up a PRINTER

Setting Up Parameters for the PRINTER

To set up a local PRINTER for use with a PRINT SERVER, see the SERVICE MANUAL for the PRINTER and the information in the following tables. After setting the parameters for the PRINTER, go to Section 6: Setting Up a PRINT SERVER.

Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER

To set up an 8100 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM, use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters.

Parameter

System Configuration

Acquire Channel Digital

Value Parameter

Image Quality

User ID

Value

MODEM Initialization Accept default

4096

MODALITY

Aspect Ratio

Enter ID per customer preference

Enter descriptive name for

MODALITY

1.0

Maximum Imageable

Columns

Network Configuration

Match Borders Option

TCP/IP Address Not applicable Force TFT to Film Dmin

Usually enabled - customer preference

Usually disabled - customer preference

Disabled

Enabled

TC/IP Net Mask

TCP/IP Gateway

Digital Configuration

Not applicable

Pixel Correct

Mag Scaling

Optics

Default Pixels per Line

Default Lines per Image

Pixel Depth

Header Mode

Parity

Communications

Parity

Stop Bits

Baud Rate

EOM

Protocol

Memory Full Message

Alarm Mode

Acquire Timeout

Not applicable

8 or 12*

Header Line

Even

1200

952

MOV

Old

Translation Speed

SOP Delay

Pixel Stretch

Facet to Stretch

SOS Delay

Laser Dead Time

SOS Level

Laser Dynamic Range

P1 (PRI to DCR/PAS)

P2 (DCR to DCR/PAS)

P3 (STP to STC)

P4 (EXP to DCR.EOE)

P5 (EOE to PTC)

* Set to 8 or 12, depending on the pixel width from modalities.

P6 (DCR to STC)

Follow on-screen instructions

Not adjustable

Follow on-screen instructions

8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER

To set up an 8200 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM, use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters.

Note

To connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the 8200 LASER IMAGER through the customer network and the MIM, you must start Internet Explorer (IE) and in the IE address window, enter the IP Address of the MIM followed by the socket number (4080) of the connection. For example: 149.98.202.200:4080

Parameter

Network Configuration

8200 TCP/IP Address 100.100.100.40

8200 TCP/IP Net Mask 255.255.255.0

8200 TCP/IP Gateway 0.0.0.0

DICOM Parameters

SCU AE Title

SCU TFT Set

SCU Contrast

Value

MIM, for example. This is the “Node Name” used to configure MIM 200 for the network.

Ver693c0.w87

SCU Smoothing

PRINTER AE Title

DV_8200, as agreed upon by user of MODALITY

PRINTER TCP/IP Port 1025

LOCAL PANEL

Language Code

Current Contrast

Current Density

Image Quality

English

2.600

Site ID

Modality

Match Borders Option

Get information from the user. This is data that will appear on each sheet of film.

Name of MODALITY

Enabled

5-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting up a PRINTER

Kodak DryView 8300, 8600 or 8610 LASER IMAGER

To set up the DIGITAL INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM, enter the values for the following parameters at the LOCAL

PANEL of the 8300/8600/8610 LASER IMAGER. The parameter values in bold apply to operation in a MIM system.

Operator Menu

Density

Parameter

Contrast

Sharp/Smooth

Film Layout

Installation Menu

AUTO (0)

1:1 Portrait

8300 Value

8600 and 8610 Value

1:1 Portrait

1. Aspect Ratio

3. Serial Control Interface:

1. Baud Rate

2. Number of Data Bits

3. Number of Stop Bits

4. Parity

5. Delimiter

6. Ignore Late Ack/Nack

7. Protocol (3M or Keypad)

6. Mark Install Date

7. Memory Management

8. Calibration Enable: ON or OFF

9. Module ID

1.0

1200*

Even*

Comma

3M* (952)

Date PRINTER is installed

Rename the input module per customer wishes

Do not change

1.0

1200*

Even*

Comma

3M* (952)

Date PRINTER is installed.

127

Rename the input module per customer wishes

Do not change.

10. Exposures: film counter

11. Cal Processor Center Temp

1. Measured Center Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required

12. Cal Processor End Temp

1. Measured End Zone Reading

13. Energy Saver Option

14. Image Viewing

15. Digital Interface

1. Parity

16. Modality Group

17. Smoothing Group

18. PM Exposures

Readjustment at installation usually not required

Customer preference

Emulsion

Even

19. Film Count Enable

20. Film Type -

On On

DVM for mammography

* Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for MIM.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Kodak DryView 8700/8500 and 969 HQ LASER IMAGERS and

Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER

Enter the following parameter values using MPC.

Important

For the 969 HQ LASER IMAGER and the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER, you must check that the Transfer Clock Speed

JUMPER on the INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM is set to 10 MHz. See the procedure in the SERVICE MANUAL.

Communication

Parity = Even

Data Bits = 8*

Image

Contrast = 10

Dmax = 3.0

Command Set = 969* Density = 13

Parity = Disable* Border = 0

Stop Bits = 1* 969 Cmd Set Beta

Horizontal = 3

Vertical = 3

Baud = 19200*

End of Message = None Dmin Mode =

Normal

Host System

Image Size Mode = New Parameter Set = 0

Alarm Mode = Old

EIB

Test Pattern = Disable

User Priority = Normal Header Mode* =

Header/Frame or

Header Line*

P1 = 0

P2 = 0

P3 = 0

Match Border = YES P4 = 0

P5 = 0

FIB Port = 0 Prescale = On

Interface = Digital EIB Parity = Even

Media Size = 14 x 17 Parity Enable =

Enable*

Media Type =

BWGEN

ID Fgnd Intensity =

255 (8 bit)

4095 (12 bit)

Port (see Note 2)

Time out = 25

Protocol = Packet

Character Pacing = 0

TFT =VER 693CØ* P6 = 0

Rotate All Images = No

Note: Click on “969 Command Set” in the

Defaults box to enter all of the above values.

Horizontal Smooth = 8

Vertical Sharp = 0

Vertical Smooth = 8

ID Bgnd Intensity = 0

Memory Full Resp = MOV Requeue = 5

Override 952 Beta = No Modality = Digital

Aspect Ratio = 1.00

Horizontal Sharp = 0

User ID = Customer

Preference

Memory Management

= Best Fit

Destination =

Processor 0***

Pixels Per Line = 0

Image Lines = 0

Pixel Width

(see Note 1)

Digital IF Timing

T6 = 200

T7 = 255

T10 = 255

Density Test Contrast

Source = NVRAM

Framing = No

Pixel Correction = Yes

Slides = 35 mm

Dual Switch = Off

Scale Format = No

Scale Magnif. = Yes

* Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for the MIM.

5-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting up a PRINTER

Communication Image Host

Note 1: Set Pixel Width to 8 or 12, depending on LASER IMAGER capability.

System EIB

Note 2: EIB Port setting:

Fiber connection: always set to 0.

Copper connection (8700/8500 LASER IMAGERS/STANDARD only): Port setting must be the same as the LASER IMAGER COM port used to connect to the MIM (i.e., if MIM connects to COM Port 0 of

LASER IMAGER, set EIB Port to 0. If MIM connects to COM port 1 of LASER IMAGER, set EIB Port to 1.)

8E8820 – NOV 2003 5-5

SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally blank.

5-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Section 6: Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Introduction

This section provides instructions for setting up these MIMs to function as PRINT SERVERS:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

The instructions set up the PRINT SERVERS to send images to these PRINTERS:

• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER

To set up a PRINT SERVER, you must have:

• A LAPTOP COMPUTER with the correct “MIM Service Application” software. See Section 2.

• The CABLES and HARDWARE installed on the system. See Section 3.

• The system software upgraded. If this installation is an upgrade, the MIM has:

– The current MIM Application software. See Section 4.

– The necessary software licenses. See Section 4.

• The LASER IMAGER that will be the destination for the MIM PRINT SERVER correctly set up. See Section 5.

This section includes these procedures for setting up a PRINT SERVER:

Checking Service Tracking

Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER

Setting Up Network Profiles for a 25 PS in a Mobile Van

Setting Up the Network Input to the PRINT SERVER

Setting Up the KEYPAD

Setting Up the Destination for Single PRINTER Setups

Setting Up the Destination for Dual PRINTER Setups

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Checking Service Tracking

[1] Connect the Service LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.

Note

You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect. For a new MIM, locate the IP Address in the pouch on the side of the MIM.

MIMs re-ghosted with V_6.1 software will have these IP Addresses:

• 123.123.123.10 for MIM 100, MIM 200 and 25 PS

• 123.123.123.200 RAS IP - for all MIMs

[2] Start the “MIM Service Application.”

[3] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Service Tracking Information.

Note

The screen displayed on your system might be slightly different from this screen.

[4] Check that the information in the “Service Tracking Information” window is correct.

[5] Did you change information?

• Yes: Click [OK].

• No: Click [Cancel].

[6] Go to the next procedure to set up the Network Address.

6-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Table 6–1 Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information

Input Parameter

Site/Hospital Name

K Number

Serial Number

Model

Service Code

Power-On-Hours

Service Phone Number

NT Product ID

MIM Application Version

Description

Where the MIM is located. This appears as an annotation if enabled within the “SCU Connection Database.”

The K Number assigned to this product by manufacturing. This should match the number on the tag on the side of the MIM.

The Serial Number assigned to this product by manufacturing. This number should match the number on the Serial Plate decal on the MIM.

Indicates the type of equipment.

Range

1-14 alphanumeric characters

1 -11 alphanumeric characters

1 - 6 alphanumeric characters

For PRINT SERVERS:

MIM 200, 25 PS

Indicates the service code of the equipment.

The number of hours that the MIM has been energized.

The software updates this number every hour. This value is used for product reliability analysis.

Telephone number of the local Technical Support Center:

1-800-328-2910. For the U.S. only.

Product ID for setting up the license for the

Windows NT operating system. Must be unique for each

MIM.

1 - 6 numeric digits

0 - 20 alphanumeric characters

This is a “view only” field. Shows the version level of the application software. For example: 5.0b12

4 alphanumeric fields field 1 = 5 characters field 2 = 3 characters field 3 = 7 characters field 4 = 5 characters

3 - 19 alphanumeric characters

1st number = release level.

Letter = development level, alpha or beta. Last number = sequence number for successive release levels.

Keypad Interfaces

Delivery Interfaces

Viewable only.

The type of output board installed along with the service code, serial number, board revision and firmware level.

Serial number only. 1-6 alphanumeric characters

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER

The “MIM Service Application” allows you to view and modify the parameters for the TCP/IP and Ethernet circuit that are used to set up the MIM as a device on the network. In most MIMs the RJ45 Ethernet connector is on the CPU MOTHERBOARD. In some MIMs the RJ45 connector is on a NETWORK BOARD located in a slot in the back of the MIM. In either case, you will use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to set it up.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select: Configure>Network.

[2] Determine from the customer if you must change any of the factory default settings in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.

[3] See Table 6-2 on

Page 6 – 5

for descriptions of the parameters in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.

• Node Name: A name that identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Node Name of a PRINT

SERVER is also the COMPUTER name of the MIM.

• IP Address: See Network Administrator

• Subnet Mask: See Network Administrator

• Gateway Address: See Network Administrator

• RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses: See Network Administrator. The 2 addresses must be sequential, and the

End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address.

[4] If you changed any information, click [OK] and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM. If you did not change information, click [Cancel].

Note

Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only.

[5] At the message “Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted,” click [OK].

[6] Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu, and select Restart from the next window.

[7] Go to “Setting Up the Network Input.”

6-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Table 6–2 Input Parameters: Network Information

Input Parameter

Node Name

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

Transceiver Type

RAS Server Begin

IP Address

RAS Server End IP

Address

Description

A unique name that identifies the local COMPUTER to TCP/IP. This name should be meaningful for the location. The Node Name for a PRINT SERVER

(SCP) is also the computer name of the MIM.

The unique address that identifies a specific node in a network. Add the unique address name to the LABEL on the side of the MIM.

The subnet mask works with the IP address to subdivide the network into more than 1 network.

The IP Address of the router used in a wide area network (WAN) configuration. No data in this field is necessary for the “MIM Service Application” software.

The TRANSCEIVER type of the NETWORK

BOARD or circuit used for network communications.

This is a “view only” field.

4 fields (0 - 255) in which each field is separated by a period

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

Range

1 - 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen: “-”

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

UTP (RJ45) is the only option for the MIM 200 or 25 PS. Although the MIM 100 has various options, RJ45 is recommended. These options are available only when using the NETWORK

COMBO CARD 10base:

• UTP (RJ45)

• Thickwire (10 base 5)

• Thinwire (10 base 2)

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. The Begin IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential.

Ending IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. The End IP Address must be higher than the

Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet. The

Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential.

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up Network Profiles for a “Mobile” 25 PS

For a 25 PS installed in a Mobile Van to connect to the network at different customer sites, a different Network Profile for each site is necessary. The IP Addresses can be set up in the “MIM Service Application” or on the KEYPAD by using “Network

Profiles.”

Creating Network Profiles Using the “MIM Service Application”

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Network Profiles.

[2] Enter information in the fields of the “Create Network Profiles” window:

• Profile Name: Enter the name of the site.

• Node ID: Enter a name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP/IP, for example: “MIM25.”

• For all Address entries: See the local Network Administrator.

6-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

[3] After entering the parameters, click [OK]. The “Network Profile Management” window will display a list of all Profile

Names that have been selected for this 25 PS.

Important

The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS can be used at that site. See

“Creating

Network Profiles at the KEYPAD” on Page 6 – 8

[4] After creating the Network Profile, advance to “Setting Up the Network Input.”

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Creating Network Profiles at the KEYPAD

[1] At the KEYPAD, press [Menu].

[2] On the Main Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Service Menu.

[3] Press [Menu].

[4] On the Service Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Configuration Menu.

[5] Press [Menu].

[6] On the Configuration Menu, press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Network Profiles.

[7] Press [Menu].

[8] Use the [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] keys to select Add to Profile.

[9] Press [Menu].

[10] Select Add Profile.

[11] On the Network Profiles menu:

• Use the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] keys to scroll through the alphabet and numbers to select the Profile Name for the site.

• Use the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] keys to select a Node ID name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP/IP, for example “MIM25.”

• Enter all fields. See the local Network Administrator for addresses.

[12] After setting up the Network Profile, advance to “Setting Up the Network input.”

Important

The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS can be used at that site. Network profiles can be Selected, Viewed, Edited or Deleted at the Keypad.

6-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up the Network Input

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Network.

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Caution

Changing parameters in this menu will take the system off-line.

[2] Click [Add].

Important

Except to select the “DICOM Port Number” or “Com Port” do not change information in the “Network Input Parameters” window. See Table 6-3.

Table 6–3 Network Input Parameter - Settings

DICOM Port Number

Primary Control

Type

Primary Control

Com Port

Configurable from 1 - 65535. Generally set to 1024 or 5040. Use default: “Keypad - Conventional” Port 5, 7, 9 or 11

[3] In the pull-down menu for “Com Port” the following are the standard port assignments:

• For MIM 200 2.4 GHz, select COM11.

• For all other MIM 200, select COM9.

• For 25 PS, select COM5.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

Com Port assignments may need to change for Combo boxes. See Table 6-4 on Page 3 – 8 for the functions and locations of

COM ports for all MIMs.

[4] Click [OK].

[5] Click [Close].

6-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Setting Up the KEYPAD for Date Format and Operating Language

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Keypads>Modify.

Caution

Changing these parameters will take the system off-line.

[2] Select the Operating Language from the Pull-down Menu.

[3] Select either the “American” or “European” format for display of the date.

[4] To store this configuration, click [OK].

Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time Zone

This procedure applies to both the DISPLAY KEYPAD and the PRINT KEYPAD.

[1] On the KEYPAD, press [Menu].

[2] On the “Main Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Service Menu.

[3] Press [Menu].

[4] On the “Service Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Machine Setup Menu.

[5] Press [Menu].

[6] On the “Machine Setup Menu,” press the [Down Arrow] until > points to Select Time Zone.

[7] To select the time zone:

• Press the [Up Arrow} or [Down Arrow] until > points to the correct time zone.

• Press [Menu] to select the time zone.

• Press [Menu] to exit.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the Destination - Single PRINTER Setups

This procedure applies to MIMs with single PRINTER destinations. If the system includes an 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER

or 969 HQ IMAGER that controls 2 destinations, do not do this procedure. Advance to “Setting Up the Destination - Dual

PRINTER Setups” on Page 6 – 16 and do the procedure for setting up dual PRINTER destinations.

Important

See the Tables and this information for the Destination Parameters.

[1] At the “Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination.

Note

With any type of CABLE, a printing or imaging destination connected to the MIM is a direct connection.

[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the sequence:

• [Add]

• [Print]

• [Direct]

• [Qualified]

6-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

[3] At the “Choose a New Direct Print Destination” window, select the correct PRINTER and click [OK].

Important

The information in the General parameters window depends on the destination PRINTER. The window in the figure is for an

8200 LASER IMAGER destination on an Ethernet cable. See Table 6-4 “General Parameters” on Page 6 – 21

for descriptions of all parameters that can be displayed.

The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER is also the AE Title for the PRINTER.

[4] At the General parameters window, enter:

• Logical Name - User defined. This is the AE Title the SCU should target.

• IP Address - Necessary only if an Ethernet OUTPUT BOARD is used.

– 100.100.100.40 for 8200 LASER IMAGERS

– 100.100.100.30 for 160 LASER IMAGERS

• Memory, Image Pixels - 32

• Node ID - 0 to 6. Necessary only for 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS.

[5] Click [Next].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-13

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

The numbers the “Media” information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the window above.

[6] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use. Check with the customer on film sizes. The table shows all film sizes allowed by LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS for Kodak.

Film Size

35 x 43 cm

35 x 35 cm

11 x 14 in.

8 x 10 in.

IMAGERS/PRINTERS

8100, 8200, 8700, 969HQT, 160 LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS

8200 LASER IMAGER; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS

8200, 8500 LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS

8300, 8600, 969HQ LASER IMAGERS; 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS

Important

You must select a media base for each medium selected. See “Format Parameters” on Page 6 – 27.

[7] If the destination printer is a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER, click [Next]. The “Output Parameters” window will display for some Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS.

6-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

[8] If the “Output Parameters” window displays, check that the Output Parameters agree with the set up of the LASER

IMAGER.

Important

The application software automatically selects defaults for the destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, you must use the “Supported Items” windows for the other groups of parameters.

[9] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:

• Supported Items

• Interpolation

• Format Types

• Page Formatting

• Image Processing

• M952 Usage

Note

When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.

[10] When processing is completed, click [Close].

[11] Advance to “Completing Configuration of the Destinations.”

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the Destination - Dual PRINTER Setups

This procedure applies to applications that include an 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER or 969 HQ LASER IMAGER that controls 2 destinations.

Important

See the Tables and this procedure for detailed information on the Destination Parameters.

[1] At the “Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination. The “Installed Destinations” window will display.

Note

If a printing destination is connected to the MIM, it is a direct connection, regardless of CABLE connection type.

[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select the sequence:

• [Add]

• [Print]

• [Direct]

• [Qualified]

[3] At the “Choose a New Direct Print Destination” window, select the correct destination from the list: 8800/8500, 8800/8700 or 8800/969HQ. Then click [OK].

6-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Important

The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER is also the AE Title for the PRINTER. The SCU selects a PRINTER by Logical Name

(AE Title).

[4] At the General parameters window, enter:

• Logical Name - The 2 destinations must be set up separately. Name them correctly. For example, call the first destination 8800_prtA and the second destination 8800_prtB.

• Memory, Image Pixels - 32

[5] If the first destination is the default destination, enter a check mark in the field for “Set As Default Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title:”

Note

This destination is where films will be printed if the SCU targets an AE Title tha is not an exact match fo the Logical Name.

[6] Click [Next].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-17

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

The numbers that the “Media” information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed in the window above.

[7] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use. Check with the customer, if necessary, on film sizes.

The table shows the correct film sizes for the Kodak DryView 8800 DUAL PRINTERS.

Film Size

35 x 43 cm

11 x 14 in.

8 x 10 in.

PRINTERS

8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/8700 LASER IMAGER;

8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/969HQ LASER IMAGER

8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/8500 LASER IMAGER;

8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER/969HQ LASER IMAGER

Important

You must select a media base for each medium selected. See “Format Parameters” on Page 6 – 27.

[8] Click [Next] to display the “Output Parameters” window.

6-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

[9] Select “Printer 1” at the top of the “Output Parameters” window.

[10] Set the “Communication” variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER.

[11] Set the “Image Transfer” variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER. Pay special attention to: “Pixel

Depth,” Acquire Mode,” and “Transfer Rate.”

Note

The application software automatically selects defaults for these groups of destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, advance to the “Supported Items” windows.

[12] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:

• Supported Items

• Interpolation

• Format Types

• Page Formatting

• Image Processing

• M952 Usage

Note

When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.

[13] When processing is completed, click [Close].

[14] Return to “Setting Up the Destination - Dual PRINTER Setups” on Page 6 – 16

, Step 1, and set up the second destination.

For the second destination in a dual PRINTER setup:

• In Step 3, select the second destination.

• In Step 4, enter the Logical Name for the second destination. This name should be logically related to the name for the first destination.

• In Step 5, if the second destination is to be the default destination, enter a check mark in the field for “Set As Default

Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title:”.

• In Step 9, the second destination, “Printer 2,” will automatically be selected.

[15] Advance to “Completing Configuration of the Destinations” below.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-19

SERVICE MANUAL

Completing Configuration of the Destinations

[1] Check that you correctly set up the destination(s) by running a test print.using “MIM Service Application”

Diagnostics>System.

[2] After completing configuration of the PRINT SERVER, advance to:

Type of System Go To:

PRINT SERVER Section 8. “Obtaining Optimum Images”

COMBO BOX Section 7. “Setting Up a MODALITY Server”

Parameter Tables

Important

Do not change any of the items in the tables for a qualified destination unless directed by the TSC. If an item is not checked in the “Supported Items” or “Media Information” windows, the customer will not be able to use that item.

• The KEYPAD of the MIM will not display a feature or function that is not allowed.

• The MIM will not recognize a request for an item that the destination does not support.

6-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 6–4 General Parameters

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Item

Logical Name

IP Address

Description

Site-specific name that must be entered for a Destination.

The “Logical Name” is also the “SCP AE Title” for the destination and is used by any SCU that wants to use this destination. A unique logical name for the MIM is necessary across all currently installed destinations.

Site-specific address that uniquely identifies the

Destination on the network. Necessary only when the destination and input to the PRINT SERVER are on an

Ethernet cable. Duplicate IP Addresses for installed destinations are allowed if the DICOM AE Titles are unique for each Destination.

Database Name The name of the Destination, if it is being installed using a known destination from the qualified destination database. This is a “view only” field.

Model The model of the Destination. The product uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular

Destination. This is a “view only” field.

ngenge

1 - 9 alphanumeric characters

No spaces allowed.

Underscores and hyphens are allowed.

4 fields of 0 - 255 where each field is separated by a period: For example: 149.110.98.10.

1 - 13 alphanumeric characters.

1 - 12 alphanumeric characters. 1120 and 2180

LASER PRINTERS, Kodak Dryview LASER

IMAGERS, 160 LASER IMAGER, Kodak

DryView PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION

SYSTEM.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-21

SERVICE MANUAL

Item

Memory

Node ID

Description

Memory in mega pixels residing in the Destination. The product uses this value to do format validation. This value is site-specific. A value must be in this field for the

“MIM Service Application.”

1 - 128. For 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS, obtain page store information from the

PRINTER’S CES port. For Kodak DryView

LASER IMAGERS, obtain by setting General log level to 5 after LASER IMAGER is installed and checking “Available Memory = log output” with system in Idle state.

1 - 6. Default is 6.

ngenge

The node assigned to the CPOI BOARD in the 1120 or

2180 LASER PRINTER. Node ID must be unique and not conflict with any Node IDs assigned to any CP

Interfaces installed in the PRINTER. A value must be in this field for the “MIM Service Application.”

6-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 6–5 Media Information Parameters

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Size

Item

[Media Info]

Description

Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information in this table.

Media sizes recognized by the Destination.

Maximum

Columns

Maximum number of pixels in the x-direction for a media size. Maximum columns can be selected for each media size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Maximum Rows Maximum number of pixels in the y-direction for a media size. Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without “common” text. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Maximum Rows with Common

Text

Types

Maximum number of pixels in the y-direction for a media size. Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without “common” text. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Media types recognized by the Destination. Media types can be selected for each media size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media size selected (blue or clear). The selections “Reflective” and

“Transparent” are valid for color printing.

Range

N/A

35 x 43 cm,

35 x 35 cm,

11 x 14 in.,

10 x 12 in.,

8.5 x 11 in.,

8 x 10 in., 4 x 6 in.,

1 - 9999

Any, Blue, Clear,

Reflective (Paper),

Transparent (Film).

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-23

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6–6 Output Parameters

Item

Command Set

Baud Rate

Description

Used for data transmission to the direct destination.

Baud rate of the SERIAL PORT for data transmission to the direct destination.

Range

952 or SuperSet

300, 600, 1200, 2400,

4800, 9600, 19200,

38400

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Pixel Depth

Header Mode

Number of data bits in each pixel in the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT. 5, 6, 7, 8; Default 8

Number of stop bits in each pixel the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT.

Parity setting for the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT.

Depth of the pixel data that the MIM will send in a data packet.

Acquire Mode

Determines if the MIM will send a header with the data packet to the direct destination OUTPUT BOARD. The header includes the size of the acquired image. If “No Header” is selected, the size of the acquired images must remain constant.

Determines whether the acquire mode for the digital input port will be Line or

Frame. If Line, the data comes across 1 line at a time.

Transfer Rate Data transfer rate of the digital image port from the MIM to the direct destination.

Applies only to the COPPER OUTPUT (COPCIL) BOARD.

Acquire Timeout Time interval allowed to transfer the image from the MIM to the direct destination.

1, 1.5, 2; Default 1

None, Even, Odd

8, 12; Default 8

No Header, Header;

Default Header

Line, Frame

1000, 2000, 4000

KHz

1 - 90 seconds;

Default 60

6-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 6–7 Parameters for “Supported Items”

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Item

[Supported

Items]

Collation

Description

Select [Supported Items] to display the features in this table.

Enables “study mode operation” at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print all of the films that are in the same “study.” Select if the destination allows Collation.

Common Text Enables the user to enter “common” text information including the macros for time/date, etc. at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. This parameter will also be used by the MIM when doing format validation.

Select if the destination allows Common Text.

Tonescaling on

Image Basis

Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape series from the KEYPAD.Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.

Pivot Density Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Pivot Density.

Print Quality

Remote Image

Deletion

Rotation

Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the

KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows different Printing Qualities.

Allows images acquired from the imaging source/image node to be sent to the destination.

Select if the destination allows Remote Image Deletion.

When enabled, allows the user to select “landscape” for a page format that is normally

“portrait” and vice versa. Also used by the MIM when validating the format. Select if the

MIM allows page Rotation.

N/A

Range

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-25

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6–8 Interpolation Parameters

Item Description

[Interpolation] Select [Interpolation] to display the features in this table.

Interpolation enables you to select an interpolation process from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.

Range

N/A

No Magnification,

Bilinear,

Replication,

Cubic Spline,

Cubic Convolution 2,

Cubic Convolution 3

6-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 6–9 Format Parameters

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Item

[Formats]

Description

Select [Formats] to display the information indicated in this table.

Custom Formats Custom formats enable the user to select formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Row Symmetric

Formats

Slide Format

Super Slide

Format

Enables the user to enter formats that only have 1 line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Enables the user to select the “slide format” from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Allowable

Formats

A list of formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what destination the user sees. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has a setting.

N/A

Yes, No

Range

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-27

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6–10 Page Formatting Parameters

Item

[Formatting

Parameters]

Aspect Ratio Mix on

Page

Image Size Mix in

Std Fmt

DICOM Annotation

Box

Requested Size

Scale

Requested Size Mix in Row

Trim

Aspect Ratio Mix in

Row

Image Size Mix in

Row

Requested Image

Size

Description

Select [Formatting] to display the information in this table.

Select if the destination allows a mixed aspect ratio on the same page. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows a mixed image size on a format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled independently to print all of the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the use of the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows the requested image to be scaled to fit the image cell on the destination. The PRINTER will notify the output that the operation was completed.

The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if all images in a row should have the same requested size. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.

Select if the destination allows Mixed aspect ratio in the same row. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows a mixed image size in row. This indicates if the image size can be changed in a row independent of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows the user to request an image size. This indicates if the destination can print images at a specific size.The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Range

N/A

Yes, No

6-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

Item

Requested Size Mix on Page

Supports True

Landscape

Maximum Images

Per Band

Maximum Bands

Per Page

Maximum Image

Columns

Maximum Image

Rows

Pixel Pitch

Minimum

Horizontal

Separation

Minimum Vertical

Separation

Trim Width - When

Enabled

Trim Width - When

Disabled

Image Pad

Description

Select if all images on the page should have the same requested size. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.

Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.

Enter the maximum bands per page that is allowed by the destination.

Enter the number of maximum image columns that are allowed by the destination

Enter the number of maximum image rows that are allowed by the destination.

Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.

Enter the number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction.The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Enter the number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction. The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format.

Range

Yes, No

1 - 32

0 - 5000

0 - 5400

0 - 32

0 - 20

0 - 10

0 - 5

0 - 10

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-29

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 6–11 Image Processing Parameters

Item

[Image Processing]

Color

Color/Grayscale Same Page

Grayscale

Minify/Crop

Maximum Image DMAX

Description

Select [Image Processing] to display the information indicated in this table.

Select if the destination allows color images.

Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale images on the same page.

Select if the destination allows grayscale images.

Formerly Decimation. Indicates if the destination can recognize images with actual dimensions that exceed the dimensions of the printable film area. Select if the destination allows Minify/Crop.

Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the destination.

N/A

Range

Yes, No

0.0 - 3.8

6-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 6–12 M952 Usage Parameters

Setting Up a PRINT SERVER

[M952]

Item

Minimum Horizontal/Vertical

Magnification

Maximum Horizontal/Vertical

Magnification

Minimum DMAX for M952

Command Devices

Description

Select [M952] to display the information indicated in this table.

Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.

Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.

Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when mapping to click counts.

N/A

0.64

Range

1.5 - 2.0

8E8820 – NOV 2003 6-31

SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally blank.

6-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Section 7: Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Introduction

This section provides instructions for setting up the following devices to function as MODALITY SERVERS:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

Before doing the procedures in this section, check that:

• The LAPTOP COMPUTER has the current “MIM Service Application” software. See Section 2.

• The system hardware and CABLES have been installed. See Section 3.

• The software for the MIM is correct. If this installation is an upgrade, the MIM must have:

– The correct application software for the MIM. See Section 4.

– The necessary software licenses. See Section 4.

The following pages include instructions for:

Checking Service Tracking

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network

Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming

Setting Up a Network Print Destination

Setting Up a Network Store Destination

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Checking Service Tracking

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.

Note

You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect:

• For a new MIM, locate the IP Address on the side of the MIM.

• After re-ghosting, the IP Address for all V_6.1 MIMs is 123.123.123.10

[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Service Tracking Information.

[3] Check that the information in the “Service Tracking Information” window is correct. See Table 7–1.

[4] Did you change information?

• Yes: Click [OK].

• No: Click [Cancel].

[5] Advance to the next procedure to set up the MODALITY SERVER for the network.

7-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Table 7–1 Input Parameters: Service Tracking Information

Input Parameter

Site/Hospital Name

K Number

Serial Number

Model

Description

The location of the MIM. This will appear as an annotation if enabled within the SCU

Connection Database.

The K Number assigned to this MIM by manufacturing.

The Serial Number assigned by manufacturing to the MIM family. The “Service Tracking” window displays the corresponding service code below the Serial Number.

Indicates the type of equipment.

Range

1-14 alphanumeric characters

1 -11 alphanumeric characters

1 - 6 alphanumeric characters

MODALITY SERVERS: MIM 200,

MIM 100NR

4 digit code

1 - 6 numeric digits

Service Code

Power-On-Hours

Indicates the service code of the equipment.

The number of hours that the MIM has been energized. The software updates this number every hour. This value is used for MIM reliability analysis.

Service Telephone Number Telephone number of the local Technical

Support Center, for U.S. only.

NT Product ID Product ID for the license for the Windows NT operating system. Must be unique for each

MIM.

0 - 20 alphanumeric characters

MIM Application Version

Acquisition Interfaces

This is a “view only” field. Shows the version level of the application software for the MIM.

For example: 6.0

Information for each interface is displayed for the MIM 200.

“Service Code”: This is a “view only” field.

“Serial Number”: Check the DATA PLATE of the INPUT or OUTPUT BOARD.

“Board/Rev ID,” “Firmware,” and “Driver

Versions” are “view only” fields.

4 alphanumeric fields field 1 = 5 characters field 2 = 3 characters field 3 = 7 characters field 4 = 5 characters

3 - 19 alphanumeric characters

The number = release level.

If included following the number:

Letter = development level, alpha or beta.

Last number = sequence number for successive release levels.

Video or Digital: 3433, 3468, 3469, or 3743

Enter the Serial Number to automatically update the other fields for Interface Type.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network

The “MIM Service Application” allows you to check and set the MIM network parameters that are necessary to set up the MIM as a device on the network.

Important

The Remote Access Service (RAS) provides IP addresses for clients, enabling access to other MIMs on the network. See the

Network Administrator for RAS IP Addresses. 2 IP Addresses per site are necessary on the same subnet as the MIM: 1 for the

MIM and 1 for the client.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select: Configure>Network.

[2] Determine from the customer the information to enter in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.

[3] See Table 7–2

for descriptions of the parameters in the “MIM Network Configuration” window.

• Node Name: Identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Node Name is also the AE Title for a

MODALITY SERVER. See Network Administrator.

• IP Address: See Network Administrator

• Subnet mask: See Network Administrator

• Gateway Address: See Network Administrator

• RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses: See Network Administrator. The 2 addresses must be sequential, and the

End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address.

[4] If you changed any information, click [OK] and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM. If you did not change information, click [Cancel].

Note

Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only.

[5] At the message “Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted...,” click [OK].

[6] Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu, and select Restart from the next window.

[7] Advance to the correct procedure:

INTERFACE BOARD Go To:

DIGITAL “Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD.”

VIDEO 60, 150LC, or 150 “Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD.”

7-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Table 7–2 Input Parameters: Network Information

Input Parameter

Node Name

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

Transceiver Type

RAS Server Begin

IP Address

RAS Server End IP

Address

Description

A unique name that identifies the local MIM to the TCP/IP network. This name should identify the location of the MIM. For a MODALITY

SERVER, the Node Name is also the AE Title.

Update the LABEL on the side of the MIM.

The unique address that identifies a node in a network. Update the LABEL on the side of the

MIM.

Works with the IP Address to subdivide the network into more than 1 network.

The IP Address of the Router used in a wide area network (WAN) setup. The “MIM Service

Application” software does not require you to enter data in this field.

The TRANSCEIVER type of the Ethernet circuit or NETWORK BOARD used for communication on the network. This is a “view only” field.

4 fields (0 - 255) in which each field is separated by a period

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

Range

1 - 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen: “-”

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

UTP (RJ45) is the only option for the MIM 200.

Although the MIM 100 has various options, RJ45 is recommended. The following options are available only when using the NETWORK COMBO CARD

10base:

• UTP (RJ45)

• Thickwire (10 base 5)

• Thinwire (10 base 2)

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. This IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence.

End IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool. This IP Address must be higher than the

Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet. The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence.

4 fields (1 - 254) in which each field is separated by a period

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters

Use this procedure to set up the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD for the MIM 200 or MIM 100.

• Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link?

• Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY?

– A Qualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has been checked in the field with correct parameters. The database in the Service Software for the MIM may also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list.

– An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field. Consult TSC before attempting to set up an Unqualified Input.

• Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input. The image must contain:

– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)

– White text on black background, or black text on white background

– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

Important

• New MIMs are set up with a “test” input. Before adding a new input, delete this existing input from the “Configuration” menu.

• Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters before continuing.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, highlight the “test” input and click [Delete].

[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the system. Are you sure?” select [Yes]. The

KEYPAD goes off-line.

[4] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:

• [Add]

• [Digital]

• [Qualified]

7-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[5] At the “Qualified Digital Modalities” window, select the correct MODALITY and click [OK].

Note

See Table 7–3 for descriptions of the Direct Connect Input Parameters.

[6] Enter the correct input parameters:

• Board/Channel: Select from the drop-down menu.

• Logical Name: Enter a name for the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, for example: dig1, dig2.

• Database Name: For Unqualified MODALITIES only, enter a name for the MODALITY.

• Modality ID Name: Enter a shortened name for the MODALITY.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-7

SERVICE MANUAL

• Primary Control Type: KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection. See Table 7–3.

• Primary Control COM Port: See Table 7–3.

• Auxiliary Control Type: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–3.

• Auxiliary Control COM Port: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–3.

• Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation: See Table 7–3.

[7] Click [OK]. This will display the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.

[8] Advance to “Setting Up the Digital Interface ‘Image’ Parameters.”

Table 7–3 Direct Connect Input Parameters

Input Parameter

Board

Channel Number

Description

INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS.

Number of the channel of the INTERFACE

BOARD.

Name for the BOARD receiving the input.

DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD 1 or 2

Channel 1

Range

Logical Name 1 - 5 alphanumeric characters

Examples: MRI 1 or CTRM 1

1 - 30 alphanumeric characters Database Name A “view only” field for Qualified MODALTIES.

Name of MODALITY was selected from list of

Qualified MODALITIES. For Unqualified

MODALITIES, a name must be entered.

Modality ID Name Shortened version of MODALITY name. This name is printed on the film when the “Modality

ID” is selected for Common Text insertion.

Primary Control

Type

What the customer uses to control the MIM.

Primary Control

Com Port

Auxiliary Control

Keypad

Auxiliary Control

Port No.

1- alphanumeric characters

Fischer STU, etc.

Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL

CABLE connection

Enables the KEYPAD for auxiliary control when

Autofilming is the primary control.

The COM Port for the KEYPAD when it is used for auxiliary control.

TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD

Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, M952/P831, Siemens

(DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), 3M (DASM, FSPOT,

SPCI), Toshiba, YMS

KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11.

Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100NR. For

MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, 8 or 10.

KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional

Autofilming: On

Important: For a MIM with Autofilming,

“Auxiliary Control” is always On.

KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11

Autofilming: COM4 or 6 for HCL, and COM5, 7 or 9 for KEYPAD.

1 - 255 Aspect Ratio:

Horizontal

Aspect Ratio:

Vertical

Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio.

Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for nonsquare pixels.

Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio.

Aspect ratios not equal to 1:1 correct for nonsquare pixels.

Page Preallocation When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a “Buffer Full” condition while MIM stores a page.

1 - 255

On, Off

7-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Setting Up the Digital Interface “Image” Parameters

Important

• Set Up the digital input for the smallest image size used at the site.

• Check the MODALITY DATABASE to determine correct parameters.

• To advance to each item in the “Digital Interface Parameters” window, press [Tab] on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

[1] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:

• [Acquisition]

• [Modify]

Note

If you want to see the “Digital Interface Parameters,” you can select:

• [Acquisition]

• [View]

[2] When the MIM prompts “Are you sure?”, click [OK].

[3] For Qualified MODALITIES, the parameters are automatically set. For Unqualified MODALITIES, all parameters in the

window must be set to the correct values. See Table 7–4 for parameter descriptions.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–4 Fields and [Buttons] for the “Digital Interface Parameters”

Parameter

Pixels per Line

Description

The default number of pixels per line that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to send.

This number will be used to determine format validation.

Lines per Image The default number of lines per image that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to send. This number will be used to determine format validation.

Parity Error-detection used by adding an even or odd number of 1’s to the binary word.

Line Timer

Range

1 - 4361

1 - 5348

None, Odd, or Even

1 - 240

Sync Mode

Pixel Depth

The number of seconds that the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD waits to receive a complete size or data packet from the Imaging Device.

If “Auto Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will continue to acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.

If “No Sync” is selected, the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will not continue to acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition.

The number of bits per pixel.

No Sync,

Auto Sync

[4] After changing information, select [Set]. If the information is correct, select [Cancel].

[5] Use the following table to advance to the next procedure:

Primary Control Type

Autofilming

KEYPAD

Procedure

“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming”

Do the procedures that apply to this site:

• “Setting Up a Network Print Destination”

• “Setting Up a Network Store Destination”

• “Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway”

• “Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option”

7-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters

This procedure applies to all 3 VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS: VIDEO 60, VIDEO 150LC, and VIDEO 150.

• Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link?

• Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY?

– An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field. Consult TSC before attempting to set up an Unqualified Input.

• Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input. The image must contain:

– Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)

– White text on black background, or black text on white background

– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

Important

• The MIM comes from the factory set up with a “test” Input. Before adding a new Input, you should delete this existing Input from the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” menu.

• See Tables 7-6 through 7-11 for descriptions of the parameters that you will enter in this procedure.

• Consult the MODALITY DATABASE for parameter information before proceeding.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, highlight the “test” Input and click [Delete].

[3] At the message, “Executing this command will delete the input from the system. Are you sure?” select [Yes]. The

KEYPAD goes off-line.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-11

SERVICE MANUAL

[4] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, select:

• [Add]

• [Video]

• [Qualified Video xxx] or [Unqualified Video xxx], as necessary

[5] If you selected “Qualified Video xxx,” the “Qualified Video xxx Modalities” window displays:

(a) Highlight the name of the correct MODALITY.

(b) Click [OK] to display the “Direct Connect Input Parameters” window.

[6] Enter the correct input parameters:

• Board/Channel (monochrome or Color-RGB): Select from the drop-down menu.

7-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

• Logical Name: Select name of VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD, for example: vid1, vid2, etc.

• Database Name: For Unqualified MODALITIES only, enter name of MODALITY.

• Modality ID Name: Enter a short name for the MODALITY.

• Primary Control Type: KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection. See Table 7–5.

• Primary Control COM Port: See Table 7–5.

• Auxiliary Control Type: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–5.

• Auxiliary Control COM Port: Used only for Autofilming. See Table 7–5.

• Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation: See Table 7–5.

[7] Click [OK] to return to the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.

[8] If the input is from a “Qualified” MODALITY, advance to “Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE

BOARD.”

[9] If the input is from an “Unqualified” MODALITY, consult TSC before entering parameters:

(a) Select [Acquisition] + [Modify] to display the “Video Board Setup” window (see Table 7–6).

(b) Select [Config] + [Horizontal Parameters].The “Horizontal Parameters” window displays (see Table 7–7).

(c) Enter parameter information from the MODALITY DATABASE and then click [OK].

(d) Repeat steps b and c for each of the 4 remaining parameter types that can be selected on the “Video Board Setup”

window: Vertical (Table 7–8), Video Gain and Offset (Table 7–9), Video Sync (Table 7–10), and Pixel Clock (Table

7–11).

(e) After entering the parameters, select [Set Parameters] from the “Video Board Setup” window.

(f) Advance to “Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD.”

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-13

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–5 Direct Connect Input Parameters

Parameter Description

Board / Channel INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS / selected channel

Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input.

Database

Primary Control

Type

Primary Control

COM Port

Name of the MODALITY. A “view only” field.

What the customer uses to control the MIM.

Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL

CABLE connection

Auxiliary Control

Keypad

Auxiliary Control

Com Port

Aspect Ratio:

Horizontal

Aspect Ratio:

Vertical

Page Preallocation

When Autofilming is selected as the Primary Control,

“Auxillary Keypad” is automatically checked. The type of KEYPAD is selectable.

The COM Port for the KEYPAD when it is used for auxiliary control. If the KEYPAD is the Primary

Control, then the “Auxiliary Control Com Port” is not user changeable.

Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for nonsquare pixels.

Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio. The software automatically determines this ratio. When the aspect ratio is not 1:1, the software corrects for non-square pixels.

When enabled, this feature ensures that sufficient memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a

“Buffer Full” condition while the MIM stores a page.

Range

VIDEO BOARD 1/Channel 1, 2, or 3, RGB

1 - 5 alphanumeric

1 - 30 alphanumeric

KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional

Autofilming: Hitachi, KCL, M952/P831,

Siemens (DASM, FSPOT, SPCI), 3M (DASM,

FSPOT, SPCI) Toshiba, YMS

KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9 or 11.

Autofilming RS422: COM 4 for MIM 100. For

MIM 200 it is COM 4, 6, 8 or 10.

KEYPAD: Touchscreen or Conventional

KEYPAD: COM 5 for MIM 100. For MIM 200 it is COM 5, 7, 9, 11.

1 - 255

On, Off

7-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–6 Windows“Video Board Setup”

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

The Terminate

Video Input panel applies to VIDEO

60 only. VIDEO

150LC is Active

Passthrough.

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD

8E8820 – NOV 2003

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

7-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter

Video Input Channel

Description

Allows selection of an RGB channel or monochrome.

Range

1,2,3, RGB or monochrome

[Config]

[Horizontal Parameters]

[Vertical Parameters]

[Gain and Offset]

[Sync Parameters]

[Pixel Clock Parameters]

[Auto Setup]

[Acquire]

Press to enter values for 5 sets of parameters.

[Constant Acquire]

Ignore Lock Detect on

Acquire

Do not enable this mode.

Ignore Signal Detect on

Acquire

Frame Average

Terminate Video Input. See

RS-232/RS-422 Converter in

Section 3.

Terminate Input Video

Terminate Ext CSyn

Image Display

Image Compression

Status

[Set Parameters]

[Set}

[Reset Parameters]

[Reset Board]

[OK] or [Close]

Automatically adjusts the values for certain parameters.

Automatically acquires and displays a test image. VIDEO 150 provides option of acquiring from “Current Settings” or “Last Saved” settings.

Do repetitive acquisitions.

When enabled, the MIM will acquire an image even if an error occurs.

The software will not compute the “Lock Detect Count”.

For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: The MIM will acquire an image even if a signal is not detected.

This feature reduces the signal noise in the image. When it is selected, a window opens to the user to enter the number of frames (2-4) on which to base the calculation of the average.

For VIDEO 60 only. (Disabled for VIDEO 150LC.) Provides 75 ohms at video input. Without this termination the image will indicate horizontal ringing. MODALITIES with high pixel clock frequency will be affected most.

For VIDEO 150 only: Same as “Terminate Video Input” for VIDEO 60 described above.

For VIDEO 60 only: Provides termination for CSync.

For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Allows selection of previous region of interest for image display.

For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Provides ability to acquire an uncompressed normal lossy or high lossy image for display.

Grayed out for VIDEO 60 and 150LC. For VIDEO 150, displays the 9

“tasks” during Auto Setup.

For VIDEO 60 or 150LC only. Stores the parameter information permanently.

For VIDEO 150 only. Stores parameter information permanently if

“Temporary” is deselected. If “Temporary” is selected, stores until next time MIM is de-energized, then energized.

Resets the parameters either to the factory default or the last saved set.

For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only. Resets the BOARD to defaults.

Exits the window without saving changes.

Not Enabled

Yes, No

Yes, No default: Off

Yes, No

N/A

Permanent,

Temporary

Default, Last Saved

N/A

7-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–7 “Horizontal Parameters”

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD

8E8820 – NOV 2003

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

7-17

SERVICE MANUAL

Horizontal Parameter

Line Time

Total Pixels per Line

Display Time

Image Pixels

Pixel Clock Frequency

Sync Width

Front Porch

Back Porch

Blanking

Calculate

Hold

[Auto Horizontal

Centering]

Shift Image Pixels L/R

Description

Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle.

Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one horizontal line.

Time in microseconds for active video in one horizontal line.

Number of image pixels per line. A combination of 4.

Pixel clock rate in MHz. The software calculates value.

Width in microseconds of the horizontal synchronization pulses.

Width in microseconds of the front porch. The software calculates the value.

Width in microseconds of the back porch.

Total in microseconds of the widths for the back porch, front porch. The software calculates this value.

For VIDEO 150 only. Calculates the pixel clock frequency using the

“Horizontal Line Time” and “Total Pixels per Line” with the option of holding constant the “Display Time” and/or “Image Pixels.” The software requires that values be entered for “Horizontal Line Time” and “Total

Pixels per Line.”

Determines which value you select for the constant during the setup.

Range

1.00 - 99.99

1 - 9999

1.00 - 99.99

1 - 9999

1.000 - 999.999

0.000 - 99.999

N/A

Display Time, Image

Pixels

N/A Do not select. Places the same number of black pixels on either side of the image. Uses the selection you make for “Shift Image Pixels...”.

The number of pixels that the image will move to the right or left when you select [Auto Centering]. Negative numbers move the image to the left, positive numbers to the right.

-9999 to 9999

7-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–8 Windows “Vertical Parameters”

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD

8E8820 – NOV 2003

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

7-19

SERVICE MANUAL

Vertical Parameter

Image Lines Per Frame

Total Lines Per Frame

Vertical Back Porch (H)

Vsync Width (H)

Serrations

Pre-equalization Width (H)

(Pre-Eq Width) Pulses

Post-equalization Width (H)

(Post-Eq Width) Pulses

Interlaced Image (Option)

Swap Fields (Option)

Interlaced Field Counter:

(in HSyncs)

Override

Vsync Serrations Present

Double H Frequency/Eq/

Serration

ASync Video Compensation

[Auto Vertical Centering]

Description

Number of vertical image lines per frame in the active video.

Number of vertical lines including vertical synchronization and equalization periods.

Number of vertical lines per field that occur after the vertical sync pulse and before the active video begins.

Width of the vertical synchronization pulse measured in Hsync pulses (H).

For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the vertical synchronization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Vsync Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.

Width of the pre-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H).

For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the preequalization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Pre-

Equalization Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.

Width of the post-equalization period measured in Hsync pulses (H).

For VIDEO 150 only. Number of serration pulses that occur during the postequalization pulse period. This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Post-

Equalization Width, and is set by the Double H Frequency/Eq/Serration” option. The software calculates the value.

Must be enabled if the image is interlaced.

Allows the order of the 2 fields (one for odd lines and one for even lines) of an interlaced image to be interchanged.

Value is automatically calculated for the number of lines or HSyncs by the software for interlaced Modalities only.

Indicates if the “Interlaced Field Counter: (in HSyncs) is overridden.

For VIDEO 150 only. Indicates that serration pulses exist during the Vsync period.

For VIDEO 150 only. If enabled, the frequency of occurrence of serration pulses during the vertical period is twice the rate of Hsync pulses. If not enabled, the frequencies are the same.

Selections for inserting serrating pulses.

Adjusts the top to bottom centering of the image on the film.

0 - 99

Yes, No

0 - 225

Yes, No

N/A

Range

1 - 9999

1 - 999

1 - 99

0 - 99

7-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Figure 7–1

HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters

Portion of SMPTE Pattern

BLACK WHITE

Pixels

1 2 3 4 5 6

WHITE

BLACK

H174_0064GC

HF LF

Important

The High Frequency (HF) response occurs at the transition of BLACK and WHITE in the SMPTE. The Low Frequency (LF) response begins at Pixel 4.

Table 7–9 Windows “Video Gain and Offset Parameters”

Parameter

Coarse Offset

Fine Offset

Coarse Gain

Fine Gain

LF Cable

Compensation

HF Cable

Compensation

Amp Offset

[Auto Level]

[Auto Offset]

Description

Coarse video offset control. One Coarse Offset step will provide a change of approximately 2 A/D counts.

Fine video offset control. One Fine Offset step will provide a change of approximately one-half A/D count.

Coarse video gain control. Set the gain level with the Coarse Gain before you use the Fine Gain.

Fine video gain control.

VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Low frequency compensation. Calculated value. The lower the number, the longer the CABLE. See Figure

7–1 on

Page 7 – 21 and the “Cable Compensation Adjustment” on page 7-21.

VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: High frequency compensation. Calculated value. The lower the number, the longer the CABLE. See Figure

7–1 on

Page 7 – 21 and the “Cable Compensation Adjustment” on Page 7-21.

VIDEO 150 only: Sets the offset voltage level applied to the variable gain video amplifiers. Used with the coarse and fine gain offset controls.

VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to do automatic gain and offset calculations.

Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.

Sets the offset. Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.

Range

VIDEO 150: 45 - 255; default: 128

VIDEO 60 and 150LC: 0

- 255; default: 128

0 - 255; default: 128

0 - 255; default 128

0 - 255: default 150

N/A

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-21

SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter

[Auto Gain]

Description

Sets the gain. Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black.

[Manual Adjustment

Tool]

VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Displays “Manual Gain/Offset” window, which provides ability to graphically plot the pixel values for lines in the image and manually adjust CABLE compensation values.

RGB Channel Select VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Selects channel to be adjusted. For monochrome signals this setting is disabled and automatically set to input channel designated from Video Setup Dialog.

For RGB signals, a single channel can be adjusted separately, or all 3 GB channels can be adjusted simultaneously. Changing the value from a single channel to RGB will write over the settings for all channels with the last selected RGB channel.

Pixel Plot Line

Number

VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Selects the line number to be plotted. Can be used to scroll through and plot lines in an image.

Plot Single Channel of RGB

[Set, Acquire and

Plot]

VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Provides ability to plot a single channel of an RGB signal. This control is disabled for monochrome signals.

VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only: Programs the parameters to the VIDEO BOARD, acquires an image and plots the pixel values for the designated line and channels. Displays the pixel plot window, if necessary.

N/A

Range

1 - 4096: default 1

N/A

Figure 7–2

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - Monochrome.

7-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 7–3

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Figure 7–4

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - RGB Color

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-23

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7–5

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD - Manual Adjustment

Table 7–10 Windows “Video Sync Parameters”

Parameter

Sync Input Source

RGB Sync Source

External Composite

Sync Polarity

Description

VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Selection of Sync Input Source, either Composite Video or External C Sync. Composite video is always the same channel as the video signal.

VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Channel selection for Sync

VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only: Polarity of the Sync Pulse.

Sync Input source

Composite Sync

Channel

VIDEO 150 only: Selection of Sync Input Source: Composite

Video, External Composite (Csync), or separate External

Hsync and External Vsync.

VIDEO 150 only: Input channel from which to derive the composite sync. Normally the same channel as the video signal, which will be selected automatically when you select [Set]

External Sync

Channel

VIDEO 150 only: Input channel from which to derive the external Csync, Hsync, or Hsync-Vsync. Normally the same channel as the video signal, which will be selected automatically when you select [Set].

Pos Ext H or C Sync VIDEO 150 only: Set for positive-going External Csync or

External Hsync signals.

Range

Composite Video (default) or External Composite (Csync)

R, G, B

Negative, Positive

Composite Video (default),

External Csync,

External H & V Sync

1,2,3,4; default 1

Yes, No

7-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Parameter

Pos Ext V Sync

Description

VIDEO 150 only: Set for positive-going External Vsync signals.

External Sync Level VIDEO 150 only: Setting for H or Csync or Vsync slicing level. A value of 127 shifts the sync to 0 VDC. A value of 0 shifts the slicing level to -3 VDC. A value of 255 shifts the slicing level to +3 VDC. Selecting [Auto H or C Sync] or [Auto

V Sync] automatically calculates these values.

Low Voltage

High Voltage

[Auto H or C Sync]

[Auto V Sync]

VIDEO 150 only: When “Auto H or C Sync” or “Auto Vsync” is selected for an external sync only, the software determines the Low Voltage H/V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync. The range of -3 VDC to +3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts. You cannot directly change this value.

VIDEO 150 only: VIDEO 150 only: When “Auto H or C Sync” or “Auto Vsync” is selected for an external sync only, the software determines the High Voltage H/V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync. The range of -3 VDC to

+3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts. You cannot directly change this value.

VIDEO 150 only: Select this button to automatically determine the Hsync slicing level. The software calculates the average of the maximum and minimum values between -3.0 and +3.0 volts for the Hsync slicing level. Composite video applied to the

External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level.

VIDEO 150 only: Select this button to automatically determine the Vsync slicing level. The software calculates the Hsync slicing level as for the Vsync slicing level. Composite video applied to the External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level.

Yes, No

Range

0 - 255: default 127

0 - 255; default 0

N/A

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-25

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 7–6

VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD

Figure 7–7

VIDEO 150INTERFACE BOARD

7-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Table 7–11 Windows “Pixel Clock Parameters”

Parameter

VCO Divisor

Override

VCO Frequency

Description

VIDEO 60 only: External divisor setting for PLL. Select from drop-down menu. The Video Control Oscillator (VCO) divisor maintains the VCO frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz and is calculated automatically.

VIDEO 150 only: External divisor setting for PLL. The divisor is selected automatically to keep the VCO frequency in the range of

15 to 150 MHz. A “view only” field.

VIDEO 60 only. Allows override of calculated PLL VCO divisor value.

Automatically calculated. A “view only” field.

Range

Values from 3 - 80, but not all numbers are included; default 3.

1, 2, 4, 8; No default

On/Off; Default Off

VIDEO 150: 75.000 - 150.000

VIDEO 60: 14.000 - 230.000

VIDEO 150LC: 150.000 - 450.000.

No defaults for any.

0 - 3; Default 3. See Table

7–12 .

Vsync Capacitor Vsync extraction capacitor setting. Automatically calculated. See

Table 7–12

Lock Detect Count VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: The number of pixel clock periods detected by the PLL between Hsync pulses. A “view only” field.

VCO Gain VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the PLL VCO gain value.

Automatically calculated

VCO Gain Override VIDEO 60 only: Allows for override of PLL VCO gain value.

Pixel Clock Freq VIDEO 150LC only: Pixel clock rate in MHz. Automatically calculated, A “view only” field.

Post-Scaler Divisor VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the PLL post-scaler divisor value used to derive the VCO frequency. This value is calculated to generate an optimized VCO frequency using the pixel clock frequency. The value is calculated unless overridden.

Post-Scaler Divisor

Override

PLL Locked

VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the calculated postscaler divisor value.

VIDEO 150LC only: Indicates whether PLL is locked. This setting is refreshed each time the pixel clock parameters are sent to the BOARD.

Phase Frequency

Detector Gain

VIDEO 60 and 150LC only: Specifies the PLL phase frequency detector gain. Automatically calculated unless overridden.

Phase Frequency

Detector Gain

Override

VIDEO 60 and VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the calculated phase frequency detector gain value.

Fine Phase Adjust: VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the fine phase adjust feedback direction for the PLL. Do not use unless directed by the TSC.

Dynamic Phase

Adjust Resolution

VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the number of steps available for the pixel clock phase delay adjustment. The value is calculated unless overridden.

Dynamic Phase

Adjust Res.

Override

VIDEO 150LC only: Allows for override of the dynamic phase adjust resolution value.

Pixel Clock Timing VIDEO 60 only: Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment relative to the data phase for the PLL. Each step represents a phase shift of about 1 nanosecond. For RGB, 3 separate channels may be adjusted.

0 - 9999; no default

0 - 7; Default 0

On, Off; Default Off

1.000 - 999.999; No default

2, 4, 8, 16; Default calculated

On, Off; Default Off

On, Off; No default

Settings 0-7; Default 0 for VIDEO

60, 6 for VIDEO 150LC

On, Off; Default Off

LEAD, LAG; Default LEAD

0, 1, 3: Default 0

On, Off; Off

0 - 255; Default 0

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-27

SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter

Pixel clock Delay

Adjust

Description

VIDEO 150LC only: Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment relative to the data phase for the PLL. Each step represents a phase shift delay of about pi/8 RADIANS. For RGB, 3 separate channels may be adjusted.

Control Voltage

HSync to Clock

Delay

VIDEO 150 only: VCO tuning voltage setting. Used to provide minimum jitter and fast lock-up times.

VIDEO 150 only: Pixel clock to horizontal sync pulse clock delay. Used to prevent line shift artifacts which may occur because of race conditions.

[Auto Pixel Clock] When pressed, automatically adjusts pixel clock phase setting to maximize pixel to pixel contrast.

[AutoControl

Voltage]

VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to automatically adjust PLL control voltage setting to ensure proper lock and minimum jitter.

[AutoHSync to

Clock]

VIDEO 150 only: Pressed to automatically adjust pixel clock to

Hsync delay setting to minimize probability of horizontal line shift.

Range

0 - 15; Default 0

0 - 63; Default 32

0 - 255; Default 0

N/A

Figure 7–8

VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD

7-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 7–9

VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Figure 7–10

VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-29

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–12 Settings for Vsync Capacitor

Setting H Line Time (microseconds)

0 - 14.29

14.49 - 32.26

32.25 - 55.56

55.57 - 64.00 and higher

HSync Frequency (KHz)

69 - 100

31 - 68.99

18 - 30.99

0 - 17.99

7-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD

Important

• The MIM must be energized for at least 5 minutes before doing “Auto Setup.” The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires about 5 minutes to stabilize.

• Check that the operator can send a test pattern from the MODALITY (e.g., a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern). If a test pattern is not available, choose the best clinical image with the following:

– Grayscale with brightest and darkest values (0 to 255 A/D Counts)

– White text on black background or black text on white background

– Sharp transitions and vertical lines

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

Important

A MODALITY must be set up before you do Step 2. Check that the MODALITY you want to configure is highlighted in the

“Direct Connect Input Configuration” window.

[2] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, click:

• [Acquisition]

• [Modify]

[3] At the “Modify Parameters” window, select [OK].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-31

SERVICE MANUAL

Important

See Table 7–6 on Page 7 – 15 for descriptions of the fields and buttons in the “Video Board Setup” window.

[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Auto Setup].

[5] For the VIDEO 60 or 150 LC INTERFACE BOARD:

(a) Wait about 1 minute while the “Video Board Setup” window displays the messages indicated below, as well as other messages. The messages might occur more than once during the process. Also, the Offset and Gain messages might interchange. If Auto Setup does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures.”

Auto Offset:Decreasing coarse auto offset (xx)

Auto Gain: Increasing coarse gain (xx)

Auto Pixel Clock: Computing derivatives (xx)

Auto Horizontal: Finding right black border

Auto Vertical: Finding top black border

(b) Select [Set Parameters}.

(c) At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Acquire] to display the test image.

(d) Check the image for “ghosting.”

• If ghosting is excessive, advance to the cable compensation adjustment on the next page.

• If ghosting is not excessive, advance to

“Checking Image Quality” on Page 7 – 35 .

Note

Ghosting is best observed in the areas of the image where the largest pixel value transition, from black to white or white to black, occurs. Ghosting occurs only for transitions in the horizontal direction.

[6] For the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD:

(a) Wait about 2 minutes until the “Status” line in the “Video Board Setup” window displays the message “Auto Board

Setup Complete.” The “Status” line shows each of the 9 setup tasks when they occur. See Table 7–13. If Auto Setup

does not finish, see Help Files “Autosetup Failures.”

(b) Select [Set].

(c) Advance to “Checking Image Quality” on Page 7 – 35

Table 7–13 The 9 Tasks Completed During [Auto Setup] for the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD

No.

Tasks Displayed in Status Line

“Input source sync auto-set”

“PLL control voltage auto set”

“PCLK to Hsync auto-align”

“Gains and offsets auto-level”

“Horizontal auto-framing”

“PCLK to Data Phase auto-align”

“Horizontal auto-framing”

“Vertical auto-framing”

“Auto setup end”

Associated Parameter Window: Field

Video Sync Parameters: [Auto Hsync] and [Auto Vsync]

Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Control Voltage]

Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Hsync to Clock]

Gain and Offset Parameters: [Auto Level]

Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]

Pixel Clock Parameters: [Auto Pixel Clock]

Horizontal Parameters: [Auto Horizontal Centering]

Vertical Parameters: [Auto Vertical Centering]

Indicates completion of Auto Setup.

7-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS

Warning

This procedure should not be done unless it is absolutely necessary. Noise or other artifacts can be induced if the adjustment is not done properly.

Important

VIDEO CABLE lengths are from 2 to 45 meters, with 10 meters the standard length. For a long CABLE the compensation may have to be increased. For a short CABLE the compensation may have to be decreased.

[1] At the “Video Board Setup window, set the “Image Compression” value to “None.”

[2] Acquire a test image.

[3] In the image viewer window, determine the line number you wish to view and move the cursor to this line.

[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Gain & Offset Parameters].

[5] At the “Gain and Offset Parameters” window, click [Manual Adjustment Tool].

Note

The ‘Manual Gain/Offset” window can be used to display 1 line of video as a linear graph to aid in adjusting the cable compensation parameters.

128

[6] Enter the line number selected in Step 3 into the Line Number dialog box, and click [Set, Acquire and Plot].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-33

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

You can zoom in on the transition by placing the cursor on the area and clicking the left mouse button. You can use the right mouse button to zoom back out.

[7] See Figure 7–11 to determine whether compensation needs to be increased or decreased. Note that the HF (High

Frequency) adjustment affects primarily the first pixel after the transition, and the LF (Low Frequency) adjustment affects multiple pixels after the transition.

[8] Change compensation values in small increments in the LF or HF Cable Compensation box. Never increase or decrease a value by more than 10 before viewing the results.

Note

The range of adjustment is 0 - 255, and the normal setting for both HF and LF compensation is 128. Decreasing the compensation number will increase the amount of compensation. Increasing the number will decrease the amount of compensation.

[9] After changing compensation values, click [Set, Acquire and Plot] to view the results.

[10] Run Auto Setup again (see page

7 – 31 ) and check for ghosting again.

[11] If necessary, repeat this cable compensation adjustment to remove ghosting.

Figure 7–11

HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters

Portion of SMPTE Pattern

BLACK WHITE

Pixels

1 2 3 4 5 6

WHITE

BLACK

H174_0064GC

HF LF

Over Compensation

Perfect Compensation

Under Compensation

Important

The High Frequency (HF) response occurs at the transition of black and white in the SMPTE. The Low Frequency (LF) response begins at pixel 4.

7-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Checking Image Quality

[1] After Auto Setup and the cable compensation adjustment (if performed), select [Acquire] at the “Video Board Setup” window to display a test image.

[2] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) and display the uncompressed ROI image:

(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.

(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

Important

• If this is color video, check each of the Red, Green, and Blue pixels in the following steps.

• To determine pixel values, check the “Pixel Value” window while you move the cursor across the image.

• You might have to execute more than 1 acquire to evaluate the quality of the image.

• To make a histogram, do Step 2 again within the existing uncompressed image.

• You can right click the MOUSE to zoom on a specific area of the ROI.

[3] Check the properties for the test image:

• Correct Gain and Offset:

Brightest white: Pixel value of 253 + 2 counts

Darkest Black: Pixel Value of 2 + 2 counts

Visible 5% and 95% grayscale values if you display the SMPTE pattern.

• Centered horizontally and vertically

• Correct clock timing: No visible pixel shift or line shift

• Straight, undistorted horizontal and vertical lines

• Clear text. Ask the operator to type more text, if necessary.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-35

SERVICE MANUAL

• Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values

[4] Use Table 7-14 as a troubleshooting guide after the quality check. If the video gain and offset parameters are not at acceptable levels, advance to:

VIDEO BOARD

60 and 150LC

150

Procedure

“Using Advance Leveling to Define Black and White Values”

“Adjusting Gain and Offset”

Table 7–14 Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image

Malfunction

Maximum grayscale counts not

253 + 2 counts.

Minimum grayscale counts not 2 + 2 counts.

Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the text of the image.

The acquired image does not include all of the image information that the

MODALITY monitor displays.

Image is too high or too low on film.

Blurred text.

Remedy

In the “Video Gain and Offset Parameters” window: Adjust the values for

Coarse Gain and Coarse Offset. Adjusting by 1 count will change pixel value by approximately 3-4. Adjust the values for “Fine Gain” and “Fine Offset.”

Adjusting by 3 counts will change pixel value by approximately 1. (If using color video, adjust the values of each color separately.) Increasing the “Gain” will cause the white pixel counts to increase without affecting the black pixels.

Increasing the “Offset” will cause the white and black pixel counts to increase.

Check that the MONITOR of the MODALITY displays the correct test image.

Execute [Auto Setup] again. Ask the operator to add more text to the image if you do not have sufficient text to evaluate.

In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Images

Lines / Frame.” In the “Video Horizontal Parameters” window, adjust the values for the “Image Pixels / Line.” Increasing these values will increase the area of the image that the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires.

In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window: Adjust Vertical Back Porch for

VIDEO 150. Adjust Vertical Shift for VIDEO 60 and 150LC.

In the “Video Vertical Parameters” window, swap fields.

Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values

Note

This procedure applies only to the VIDEO 60 and 150LC VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS.

[1] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Acquire].

[2] In the “Uncompressed Region Of Interest” window, hold and drag the left mouse button to select a region of interest, including a grayscale area. The “Uncompressed Region of Interest” screen is displayed.

[3] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to include grayscale:

(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.

(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

[4] Move the cursor to the blackest point of the screen. Hold the “b” key and press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be entered in the Black area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.

[5] Move the cursor to the whitest point of the screen. Hold the “w” key and press the right MOUSE button. The x and y coordinate values will be entered in the White area of the “Advanced Leveling” window.

[6] In the “Advanced Leveling” window, select [Perform Leveling].

7-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[7] Close the Region Of Interest window.

[8] In the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Set Parameters].

[9] Select [Acquire].

[10] Select a Region of Interest (ROI) to check the gain and offset values:

(a) Use the MOUSE to click-and-drag a rectangle around an ROI: You must drag the MOUSE from the top-left position of the ROI to the bottom-right position of the ROI.

(b) Release the MOUSE click. The uncompressed image displays.

[11] If gain and offset are still not acceptable, advance to the next procedure to adjust gain and offset.

Adjusting Gain and Offset

[1] At the “Video Board Setup” window, click [Gain & Offset Parameters].

VIDEO 60 AND 150LC BOARD-

Monochrome

VIDEO 60 and 150LC - RGB Color

VIDEO 150 BOARD

[2] Select the necessary dialog box. See Table 7-14.

[3] Enter the changes and select [OK].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-37

SERVICE MANUAL

[4] At the “Video Board Setup” window, select [Set Parameters].

[5] View the image and repeat the adjustment as necessary.

[6] After completing the adjustment, click [OK] in the “Gain and Offset Parameters” window.

[7] Click [Set Parameters] in the Video Board Setup” window.

[8] To see the image and check the changes you have made, click [Acquire] in the “Video Board Setup” window.

[9] If necessary, repeat the adjustment procedure.

[10] When you are satisfied with the test image, click [OK] in the “Video Board Setup” window.

[11] After completing video adjustment, advance to:

Primary Control Type

Autofilming

KEYPAD

Procedure

“Setting Up the MIM for Autofilming” in next procedure.

Do in turn the procedures that apply to this site:

• “Setting Up a Network Print Destination.”

• “Setting Up a Network Store Destination.”

7-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Notes on Adjusting Image Quality

Optimum image quality can be achieved from the MIM by adjusting the video signal and parameters. In a video environment, the process begins with a good video signal. This signal must then be adjusted in the MIM. Check that you have done the following:

• Use the correct parameters to acquire the video signal for digitization.

• Check that the image is centered correctly - both vertically and horizontally.

• Set the gain and offset correctly to obtain the correct black and white values. See “Defining Black and White Values (Using the Advanced Leveling Feature)”.

• The pixel clock must be correctly timed with the data signal pixels.

The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS have an Auto Setup feature that will accomplish this setup when the correct video signal is provided. When the algorithm has completed, check the image for the correct values for gain and offset. For optimum quality in monochrome images, the black value should be 2 ±2 and the white value should be 253 ±2. If the adjustment is for color images, these values should be 1 -1/+0 (0 or 1) for black and 254 +1/-0 (254 or 255) for white. Check these values in the red, green and blue color plane for the correct values.

“Advanced Leveling” is a feature of the VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS. It allows the user to choose a position for black and white values. Normally, the MIM uses the entire image to find a part that it calls black and white. When a

MODALITY provides a computer-generated grayscale, the black and white points can be selected from it. This will provide a known black and white point for the MIM to use to adjust gain and offset. After this algorithm runs, you should check the images for the proper gain and offset values. This feature can be especially useful for Ultrasound images and can be used for images from all MODALITIES. See “Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values.”

• Print a page of images to check that the timing is correct.

• Check that transitions from black to white are sharp and clear.

• Print a curve series, contrast series, or color print matching series.

In versions of software prior to V_3.2, only the curve series or the color print matching series could be run. The curve series is used for the 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS. Different contrast settings will produce a different looking image when printing the curve series. 11 contrast settings can be used. The user can select from 6 curve shape prints for each contrast setting.

The contrast series is used for all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and any IMAGERS connected to the 9410

ACQUISITION SYSTEM. The correct TFT/ULUT (Transfer Function Table/Universal Look Up Table) should be selected before printing this contrast series. The user can select from 16 images in the series. The 160 LASER IMAGER requires the use of this contrast series to adjust image quality.

Setting the curve shape and the contrast settings depends on the MODALITY. Some Autofilming links will send the values to use, and some will use the default settings in the MIM.

The contrast setting could be sent with the DICOM information, but defaults in the MIM are used in case these values are not sent. In versions below V_3.2, only one default value was used by all Service Class Users (SCUs). Starting with V_3.2, the default values for each SCU can be set at the MIM.

Starting with V_3.2, the SCU sends the MODALITY type, body part, and image tone adjustment information to the print and storage destinations. The MODALITY type can be set up using the “MIM Service Application” and the body part (if series is enabled) can be selected at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD. The MODALITY type and body part information is useful when sending to storage destinations to enable hanging protocols and features of certain WORKSTATIONS. MODALITY type is useful when sending DMI print destinations through the network to select image processing techniques.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-39

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming

Important

• For Autofilming, an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the MODALITY and the MIM.

• Current MIMS use only RS422.

• For Autofilming connections that require RS232, install the CONVERTER KIT 8B8186 (Catalog No. 121-2018) to changes the RS232 signal to RS422.

• Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters.

[1] At the “Direct Connect Input Configuration” window, click:

• [Autofilming]

• [Modify]

[2] At the prompt “Are you sure?” click [OK]. The “Autofilming Parameters” window displays.

[3] At the window for the type of Autofilming at the site, enter the correct information. See Table 7–15 and

Table 7–16.

[4] If you did not change information, click [Cancel].

[5] If you changed information, click [Set].

Important

After changing the setup information, you must click [Set] or the changes will be lost.

[6] After setting up for Autofilming, advance to “Setting Up a Network Print Destination.”

7-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Table 7–15 Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters

Parameter Autofilming Link

Hitachi KCL

Port ID

Baud Rate

Driver Type

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

ACK Wait Timer

Ack Required --

Memory Full Response --

Host Assume 4800

Lines

1 even

4800

9600

RS422 R2332**

8 8

1 none

M952/

P831

1200

RS422

MOV

1 even

Siemens or 3M*

SPCI/FSPOT DASM

2400

RS232**

2 odd

4800

RS232**

1 even

Toshiba

9600

RS422

1 even

YMS

1200

RS422

2 odd

Report Alarms

Host Assume 300 DPI --

Variable Correction

Store Key Active

-active

Receive Message Timer

Start Timer

EOT Wait Timer

Switch Mode

Switch Handling

-active

KEYPAD

Not

Allowed

Yes active

-active

KEYPAD

-active

Automatic Film Type

Selection

DTR Connect

Default Horiz. Frames

Default Vertical Frames

Autoprint

AutoFormat

Interpolation: Sharp --

Interpolation: Smooth --

On***

Off

Replication***

On***

Off

Replication***

Cubic Spline*** Cubic Spline*** --

Emulate 3M --

Extended Page Formats --

Off

Notes:

* For all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and 969/8800, select “3M” parameters for the Primary Control Type. For the

160 LASER IMAGER, and 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS, select “Siemens” for the Primary Control type.

** Allowed by the MIM 100 only. All other models must have RS232 changed to RS422. See the “Important” at the top of

Page 182.

*** Applies to 3M-Siemens only.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-41

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–16 Autofilming Parameter Definitions and Range

Port Id

Baud Rate

Driver Type

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Item

ACK Wait Timer*

Ack Required*

Description

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT

Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.

Range

MIM 100: COM 4, MIM 200:

COM 4, 6, 8, OR 10

300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT. MIM 100: RS422

MIM 200: RS422

Number of bits for serial communications.

7, 8

Number of stop bits for serial communications.

Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.

1, 2

None, Even, Odd

1 - 999 Acknowledgment wait timer. The time in seconds that the MIM will wait after it sends a message until the Imaging Device acknowledges that it received the message.

Determines whether or not an acknowledgment is required from the “host.”

Yes, No

MOV, BSY Memory Full Response* Specifies what the Memory Full response should be for the

“host.”

Host Assume 4800 Lines* Specifies whether the “host” assumes that the destination has

4800 lines on a page.

Report Alarms* Flag that indicates if the MIM should report to the

MODALITY alarm conditions associated with the PRINTER.

Host Assume 300 DPI* Specifies whether the “host” assumes that the destination has

300 DPI.

Variable Correction* Specifies whether the MIM will attempt to reduce the number of lines in the last image band to fit the film (without minifying the image).

Yes, No

On, Off

Yes, No

Active, Inactive Store Key Active* Determines if [Store] on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control.

Receive Message Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to receive an entire message.

Start Timer* Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits for the Imaging Device to reply to a handshake character.

EOT Wait Timer*

Switch Mode*

Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits to receive an End of Transmission (EOT) character from the

Imaging Device.

Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console of the Imaging Device (Host) or the Auxiliary KEYPAD.

Switch Handling*

Automatic Film Type

Selection*

DTR Connect*

Default Horizontal

Frames*

Default Vertical

Frames*

Autoprint*

The process used to handle stored images when filming is switched between the“host” and the Auxiliary KEYPAD.

Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER

PRINTER must be used to automatically select the film size and film base.

Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MIM must wait for the Imaging Device to respond to a handshake character.

The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM defaults to.

The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM defaults to.

Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically print the page when the last image on the page is stored.

1 - 999

1- 999

Keypad, Host

Not Allowed

On, Off

1 - 9

On, Off

7-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

AutoFormat*

Interpolation: Sharp*

Interpolation: Smooth*

Description

Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically set up for a new page of the same format after it makes a print of a page.

Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Sharp interpolation.

Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Smooth interpolation.

On, Off

Range

Bilinear, Cubic Spline, Cubic

Convolution 2, Cubic

Convolution 3, No

Magnification, Replication

Bilinear, Cubic Spline, Cubic

Convolution 2, Cubic

Convolution 3, No

Magnification, Replication

True, False Emulate 3M*

Extended Page

Formats*

Specifies whether the Toshiba or YMS Autofilming link will emulate the behavior of the 3M Toshiba or YMS interface.

Flag that determines if the MIM will allow the extended page formats (15:1, 16:1, 20:1, 24:1) that can be selected at the

Auxiliary KEYPAD. Older YMS Imaging Devices do not support the new page formats.

Note: Parameters indicated by * do not apply to all types of Autofilming.

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-43

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up a Network Print Destination

Important

See the tables on

7 – 49 and following for detailed information on the Destination Parameters.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination. The “Installed Destinations” window will display.

Important

The following procedure for installing destinations must be done for each network destination.

[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select from the “Update Configuration” panel the following sequence:

• [Add]

• [Print]

• [Network]

• [Qualified]

7-44 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[3] At the “Choose a New Network Print Destination” window, select the correct SERVER/PRINTER combination from the list and then click [OK].

[4] At the “General” parameters window, enter the Logical Name for the destination, the IP Address, and the Memory value.

[5] Click [Next].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-45

SERVICE MANUAL

Important

You must select a media base for each media item selected in the “Media” window.

[6] In the “Media” window, select all media that the customer will use.

Note

The numbers the “Media Information” window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the screen.

[7] After entering the media parameters, click [Next].

7-46 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[8] At the DICOM window, check the following parameters:

• Protocol: DICOM 3.0

• Service Class: Basic Grayscale Print

• Port Number: Enter as necessary by the SCP.

• AE Title: Enter as necessary by the SCP.

• Timers/Counters: Accept the defaults.

Important

With Version 5.0 and higher, the application software for the MIM automatically selects defaults for these destination parameters. To select values other than the defaults, click [Next] to proceed to the “Supported Items” window and to windows for the other groups of parameters.

[9] Click [Finish] to select the defaults for these destination parameters:

• Supported Items

• Interpolation

• Format Types

• Page Formatting

• Image Processing

• M952 Usage

Note

When [Finish] is clicked, the “Installed Destinations” window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information.

[10] When processing is completed, click [Close].

Important

You must repeat the destination setup procedure for each network print destination.

[11] To check that the network destinations are correctly set up:

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-47

SERVICE MANUAL

(a) Start the “MIM Service Application” and select Diagnostics>Network.

(b) Execute a Ping and/or DICOM Echo:

• Enter the IP Address of the new destination for a Ping.

• Enter the IP Address, port number and AE title for a DICOM Echo.

(c) Click [OK].

(d) Click [Cancel] from the “Network Diagnostics” window.

[12] After completing the network print destination setup, use the table below to advance to the correct procedure:

Procedures to Complete:

Does the MODALITY SERVER have Store

Destinations?

Will the MODALITY SERVER be connected to an HIS/RIS Gateway?

Has the FOOTSWITCH been modified for the

MODALITY Store Option?

Have you finished setting up the MODALITY

SERVER?

Advance to:

“Setting Up a Network Store Destination” on

Page 7 – 60

“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS Gateway” on page

Page 7 – 68

“Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store

Option” on page

Page 7 – 75

Section 8, Obtaining Optimum Images

Parameter Tables

Important

• Do not modify any of the items in the following tables for a qualified destination unless directed to by the TSC. If an item is not checked in the “Supported Items” or Media Information” window, the customer will not be able to access that item.

• The KEYPAD will not display features or functions that are not allowed.

7-48 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–17 General Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

Logical Name

IP Address (This will be blank for a Direct option.)

Description

Site-specific name for a particular Destination. The

KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects a

Destination. The MIM requires a logical name that is unique across all currently installed destinations.

Site-specific address that uniquely identifies the

Destination on the network. The Service Application for the MIM requires the user to enter a value. Duplicate IP

Addresses for installed destinations are acceptable if the

DICOM AE Titles are unique for each destination.

Database Name The name of the Destination if it is being installed using a known destination from the qualified destination database.

This is a “view only” field.

Model The model of the Destination. The MIM uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular

Destination. This is a “view only” field.

Memory Memory in megabytes residing in the Destination. The

MIM uses this value to validate the format. This value is site-specific. The Service Application requires a value in this field.

Range

1 - 9 alphanumeric characters

No spaces allowed.

Underscores are allowed.

4 fields of 0 - 255 where each field is separated by a period:

For example: 149.110.98.10.

1 - 13 alphanumeric characters

1 - 12 alphanumeric characters.

Kodak Ektascan LASER PRINTERS, Kodak

DryView LASER IMAGERS, 160 LASER

IMAGER, Kodak PACS LINK 9410

ACQUISITION SYSTEM.

1 - 99. For the 2180 and 1120 LASER

PRINTERS, obtain page store information from the printer’s CES port.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-49

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–18 Media Information - for Print Destinations

Size

Item

[Media Info]

Description

Select [Media Info] to display the Media Information indicated in this table.

Media sizes allowed by the Destination.

Maximum

Columns

Maximum number of printable pixels in the x-direction for a particular media size.

Maximum columns can be selected for each media size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size.

Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without common text.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Maximum Rows with Common

Text

Types

Maximum number of printable pixels in the y-direction for a particular media size.

Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without common text.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Media types allowed by the Destination. Media types can be selected for each media size. “Any” indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media size selected (blue or clear). The selections “Reflective” and

“Transparent” are valid for color printing.

Range

N/A

35 x 43 cm

35 x 35 cm

11 x 14 in.

11 x 11 in.

10 x 12 in.

8.5 x 11 in.

8 x 10 in.

4 x 6 in.

1 - 9999

Any, Blue, Clear,

Reflective (Paper),

Transparent (Film).

7-50 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–19 DICOM Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

Protocol

Service Class

Port Number

AE Title

Association Retry

Counter

Response Message

Description

Protocol used to communicate with the Destination.

The service class provided by the Destination.

The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to make a socket connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages.

Range

DICOM 3.0

Print or Store

0 - 65535

The Applications Entity (AE) Title specifies the Destination application that the MIM must communicate with for successful DICOM communications.

1 - 16 alphanumeric characters

Specifies the number of retry attempts in establishing a DICOM association. 1 - 999

Specifies the time to wait for a response after a message is sent. Meaningful only when the MIM is functions as a DICOM SCU.

1 - 999 seconds

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-51

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–20 Supported Items Parameters - for Print Destinations

Item

[Supported

Items]

Media Bin

Default

Pivot Density

Print Quality

Description

Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table.

Collation Enables “study mode” operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all films that belong to the same study. Select if the destination allows Collation.

Common Text Allows the user to enter common text information (including the macros for time/date, etc.) at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. This parameter will also be used by MIM when validating the format. Select if the destination allows Common text.

Tonescaling on

Image Basis

Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape series from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.

Enables selecting a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size/type is not specified by a DICOM input. Select if the destination allows this feature.

Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows pivot density.

Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD.

Select if the destination allows different printing qualities.

Remote Image

Deletion

Rotation

Enables images to be sent to the destination when they are acquired from the imaging source/ image node. Select if the destination allows remote image deletion.

Allows the KEYPAD to prevent the customer from selecting a page orientation of landscape for formats that are normally portrait (and vice versa) from the KEYPAD that is not allowed by the destination. The MIM also uses this to validate the format. Select if the MIM allows page rotation.

Range

N/A

Yes, No

7-52 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–21 Interpolation Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item Description

[Interpolation] Select [Interpolation] to display the supported features indicated in this table.

Interpolation allows the user to use the KEYPAD or other input to select from a list of interpolation modes.

Range

N/A

No Magnification,

Bilinear,

Replication,

Cubic Spline,

Cubic Convolution 2,

Cubic Convolution 3

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-53

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–22 Format Parameters - for Print Destinations

Item Description

[Format Types] Select [Format Types] to display the information indicated in this table.

Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Row Symmetric

Formats

Enables the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Slide Format

Super Slide

Format

Allowable

Formats

Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The

MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

A list of standard formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what the users see for a specific destination. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has 1 setting.

N/A

Yes, No

Range

Yes, No

7-54 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–23 Page Formatting Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

[Formatting

Parameters]

Aspect Ratio Mix on

Page

Image Size Mix in

Std Fmt

DICOM Annotation

Box

Requested Size

Scale

Requested Size Mix in Row

Trim

Aspect Ratio Mix in

Row

Image Size Mix in

Row

Requested Image

Size

Requested Size Mix on Page

True Landscape

Description

Select [Formatting] to display the Formatting information indicated in this table.

Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows mixed image size on standard format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the DICOM Annotation Box to be used for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination should scale the image to fit the image cell area of the destination. The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows all images in a row to be the same size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border to around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.

Select if the destination allows mixed aspect ratio in the same row. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows mixed image sizes in row. Allows the image size to be changed separately of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows the user to select an image size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows all images on the page to have the same requested size.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.

Range

N/A

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-55

SERVICE MANUAL

Item

Maximum Images

Per Band

Maximum Bands

Per Page

Description

Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.

Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination.

Maximum Image

Columns

Maximum Image

Rows

Pixel Pitch

Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination.

Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination.

Minimum

Horizontal

Separation

Minimum Vertical

Separation

Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.

The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction.The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Trim Width

Disabled

The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Range

1 - 32

0 - 5000

0 - 5400

0 - 32

0 - 20

0 - 10

0 - 5

7-56 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–24 Image Processing Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

[Image Processing]

Color

Color/Grayscale Same Page

Edge Enhancement

Grayscale

Minify

Maximum Image DMAX

Description

Select [Image Processing] to display the information indicated in this table.

Select if the destination allows color images.

Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale images on the same page.

Allows the user to select edge enhancement parameters (e.g.,

MODALITY type and image tone adjustment values) from the

KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows edge enhancement.

Select if the destination allows grayscale images.

Formerly Decimation. Indicates that the destination can accept images with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the image cell where the image will be printed. Select if the destination allows Minify.

Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the destination.

N/A

Range

Yes, No

0.0 - 3.8

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-57

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–25 SCU Parameters - for Print Destinations

Density

Item

Density Space

Luminance Space

Variable Border

Curve Shape

Tonescaling

Perception LUT

Tonescaling

PLUT Service

Extended Print

Attributes

7-58

Description

Density space allowed by the destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using density space (code value 0 represents white and code value 255 represents black). In DICOM, density space is represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 1.”

Luminance space allowed by the destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using luminance space (code value 0 represents black and code value 255 represents white). In DICOM, luminance space is represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 2.”

Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density between black and clear. The parameter has no meaning for store destinations.

Specifies whether the destination allows Curve Shape Tonescaling with Curve shape and contrast. Determines if the MIM will send Curve Shape Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.

Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT set and contrast setting. Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT

Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of

PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.

Specifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables (PLUTs).

PLUTs are used to standardize “tonescaling” information for the same image on any type of PRINTER. Information in PLUT includes curve shape, contrast, pivot density, TFT set, DMIN, DMAX, and border DMAX. Parameter has no meaning for store destinations.

These attributes (MODALITY, body part, and image tone adjustment) can be used by some destinations to enhance image quality. The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination.

Range

Yes, No

Yes, No.

NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–26 M952 Usage Parameters - for Print Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[M952]

Item

Minimum Horizontal/Vertical

Magnification

Maximum Horizontal/Vertical

Magnification

Minimum DMAX for M952

Command Devices

Description

Select [M952] to display the information indicated in this table.

Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.

Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is allowed by the destination. This parameter does not apply to store destinations.

Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when mapping to click counts.

N/A

0 - 64

Range

0 - 64

1.5 - 2.0

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-59

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up a Network Store Destination

Important

• Before you enter the Storage Destination Parameters, verify the information at the Destination.

• If this is the first Storage Destination, see “Enabling Software Licenses” in Section 4.

• In the “Destination Parameters” window, press [Tab] on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to advance to the next field.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Destination.

[2] At the “Installed Destinations” window, select:

• [Add]

• [Store]

• [Qualified] or [Unqualified]

[3] Select the store destination and click [OK].

7-60 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

[4] At the “General” parameters window, enter the following parameters. See Table 7-27.

(a) “Logical Name”

(b) “IP Address”

[5] Click [Next].

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-61

SERVICE MANUAL

[6] In the “DICOM” window, enter the required information (see Table 7-27).

[7] Click [Finish]. This will select default values for the following groups of parameters:

• Supported Items

• Formats

• Page Formatting

• SCU

Note

Descriptions of the parameters in these groups is provided in Table 7–28 through Table 7–31.

Table 7–27 Destination Parameters: Names, Addresses and DICOM Information

Item Description

Logical Name

IP Address

Site-specific name that you must enter for a particular Destination.

The KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects a

Destination. The MIM requires a unique “Logical Name.” The

“Logical Name” of the DICOM PRINT SERVER is the “AE

Title”.

Site-specific address that identifies the Destination on the network. The Service Application for the MIM requires the user to enter a value. Two or more Destinations must not have the same IP

Address.

Database Name The name of the Destination selected from the Destination database. This is a “view only” field.

Model The model of the Destination. The MIM uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular Destination. This is a

“view only” field.

Memory The amount of memory in megabytes residing in the Destination.

The MIM uses this value to validate the format. This value is sitespecific. The Service Application for the MIM requires that the user enter a value in this field.

[DICOM Info] Select [DICOM Info] to display the DICOM information indicated in this table.

Protocol Protocol used to communicate with the Destination.

MEDICAL VIEWING STATION

(MVS), MEDICAL IMAGE AND

INFORMATION LIBRARY (MIIL)

1 - 99

Range

1 - 9 alphanumeric characters

No spaces allowed.

Underscores are allowed.

4 fields of 1 - 254 where each field is separated by a period. For example:

149.110.98.10

1 - 13 alphanumeric characters

N/A

Service Class

Port Number

The service class provided by the Destination.

The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to make a socket connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages.

DICOM 3.0

Store

0 - 65535; default 104

AE Title The Applications Entity (AE) Title specifies the Destination application that the MIM must communicate with for successful

DICOM communications. The field width for this parameter is 1 -

16 alphanumeric characters.

1 - 16 alphanumeric characters

Timers/Counters] This feature is used for DICOM communication, and is configurable per site. It specifies the number of retries per message and the amount of time to wait for a response after sending a message.

7-62 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–28 Supported Items Parameters - for Store Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

[Supported

Items]

Collation

Description

Select [Supported Items] to display the supported features indicated in this table.

Enables “study mode” operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all films that belong to the same study. Select if the destination allows Collation.

Common Text Enables the user to enter common text information (including the macros for time/date, etc.) at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format. Select if the destination allows Common text.

Tonescaling on

Image Basis

Enables the user to change the curve shape in the middle of a page and select a curve shape series from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis.

Media Bin

Default

Pivot Density

Print Quality

Selects a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size/type is not selected by a

DICOM input. Select if the destination allows this feature.

Range

N/A

Yes, No

Selects a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows pivot density. Yes, No

Selects the print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD. Select if the destination allows different printing qualities.

Yes, No

Remote Image

Deletion

Rotation

Sends images to the destination as soon as they are acquired from the imaging source/image node. Select if the destination allows remote image deletion.

Prevents the customer from selecting a landscape page for formats that are normally portrait

(and vice versa) from the KEYPAD that the destination does not allow. The MIM uses this to validate the format. Select if the MIM allows page rotation.

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-63

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 7–29 Format Parameters - for Store Destinations

Item Description

[Format Types] Select [Format Types] to display the information indicated in this table.

Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Row Symmetric

Formats

Allows the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Slide Format

Super Slide

Format

Allowable

Formats

Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs. The

MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs.

The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

A list of formats that the destination allows. This list can be customized to control what the users see for a specific destination. Each format (1up, 2up, 4up, etc.) has 1 setting.

N/A

Yes, No

Range

Yes, No

7-64 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–30 Page Formatting Parameters - for Store Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

[Formatting

Parameters]

Aspect Ratio Mix on

Page

Image Size Mix in

Std Fmt

DICOM Annotation

Box

Requested Size

Scale

Requested Size Mix in Row

Trim

Aspect Ratio Mix in

Row

Image Size Mix in

Row

Requested Image

Size

Description

Select [Formatting] to display the Formatting information indicated in this table.

Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows mixed image size on a standard format. This indicates if the image size can be changed on a page with a row/column symmetric format. The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows page annotation. This indicates if the destination allows the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows the user to request an image to fit the image cell allowed by the destination. The size of the image should be scaled to match the available image cell area. The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows all images of the same size in a row. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows Trim. This allows the user to select a border around each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices.

Mixed aspect ratio in the same row allowed by the destination. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows mixed image size in row. This indicates if the image size can be changed in a row independent of the page format. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination can print images at a specific size. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Range

N/A

Yes, No

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-65

SERVICE MANUAL

Item

Requested Size Mix on Page

True Landscape

Maximum Images

Per Band

Maximum Bands

Per Page

Maximum Image

Columns

Maximum Image

Rows

Description

Select if the destination allows the same size for all images on the page. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation.

Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination.

Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination.

Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination.

Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination.

Pixel Pitch

Minimum

Horizontal

Separation

Minimum Vertical

Separation

Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination.

The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Trim Width

Disabled

The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction when trim is not on. The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format.

Range

Yes, No

1 - 32

0 - 5000

0 - 5400

0 - 32

0 - 20

0 - 10

0 - 5

7-66 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Table 7–31 SCU Parameters - for Store Destinations

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Item

Density Space

Luminance Space

Variable Border

Density

Curve Shape

Tonescaling

Perception LUT

Tonescaling

PLUT Service

Extended Print

Attributes

Description

Density space allowed by destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using density space (code value 0 is white, and code value 255 is black). In

DICOM networks, density space is indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 1.”

Luminance space allowed by destination. Determines if the MIM can send images using luminance space (code value 0 is black and code value 255 is white). In DICOM, luminance space is indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as “monochrome 2.”

Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density between black and clear. The parameter has no meaning for store destinations.

Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT set and contrast setting. Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT

Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of

PLUTs. Has no meaning for store destinations.

Specifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables (PLUTs).

PLUTs are used to standardize “tonescaling” information for the same image from any type of PRINTER. Information in PLUT includes curve shape, contrast, pivot density, TFT set, DMIN, DMAX, and border DMAX. Parameter has no meaning for store destinations.

These attributes (MODALITY type, body part, and image tone adjustment) can be used by some destinations to enhance image quality. The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination.

Range

Yes, No

Yes, No.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-67

SERVICE MANUAL

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS/RIS GATEWAY

Setting Up an HIS/RIS Gateway for a MIM with TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD

Important

Each input channel must be set up. To set up the MODALITY information the first time, do all remaining steps. If the

MODALITY information has previously been set up, advance to Step 3 .

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

[2] At the “Configuration” window, select Modality Info>Modify.

[3] At the prompt “Are you sure?,” click [OK]. The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the “Modality Info.”

[4] At the “Type” line, select the Down Arrow and highlight a MODALITY from the list.

Note

The “Type” parameter enables “preferences” and “tonescaling” on some WORKSTATIONS. “Type” sets up an algorithm for the MODALITY (e.g., MR for Magnetic Resonance). The other fields can be any information that is meaningful to you and the site. Once set up, the information for the MODALITY will be used for HIS/RIS and storage class destinations.

[5] Enter any additional information in other fields.

[6] At the “Modality Info” screen, click [OK].

[7] At the “Configuration” window, click [Close].

Note

Check the Storage Destination connection by executing a ping. If the ping does not work, you will have to set up the destination or troubleshoot the problem.

[8] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Diagnostics>Network.

[9] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, press [Run].

[10] At the “Input IP Address” window, enter the “IP Address” of the storage device.

[11] Click [OK].

[12] At the “Network Diagnostics” window, press [Cancel].

[13] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>HIS/RIS Gateway.

Important

• You must set up the HIS/RIS Gateway at the KEYPAD for the MIM to successfully query the “Patient Worklist.” See

Section 13 for instructions for setting up a “Mitra PACS Broker” to send Event Notifications to the MIM.

• When the KEYPAD on the MIM displays either “Study Info” or the “Patient List” screen, the application software for the

MIM queries the HIS/RIS GATEWAY every 2 minutes and updates the new information on the “Patient List” screen.

• The KEYPAD displays records in the “Patient List” for a configurable time.

7-68 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[14] At “HIS/RIS Gateway Configuration,” enter the correct values:

IP address

Parameter

AE Title

Port Number

Override Study Description with RPD

Scheduled Procedure Start

Time

Support Study Description

Description

Site specific

The Application Entity (AE) Title of the HIS/RIS Gateway

The DICOM communication port

Determines whether the MIM will query the HIS/RIS

BROKER by the study description (default) or the requested procedure description. The MIM will display the requested procedure description (RPD) in the study description field when this option is selected.

Disabling causes the MIM not to request the scheduled procedure start time on a query.

Disabling causes the MIM not to query the Broker for Study

Description.

Mitra GATEWAY

Site specific

BROKER

3320

On, off

On, Off

[15] Press [Set].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-69

SERVICE MANUAL

Adding the “Station Name” at the KEYPAD

[1] Using the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, press:

(a) [Main Menu]

(b) [Service]

(c) [More Options]

(d) [HIS/RIS Configuration]

(e) [Add Station Name]

[2] Using either the KEYPAD or the MINI-KEYBOARD, type the name of the station and then press [Enter].

[3] Press [Return].

[4] Press [Polling Interval].

[5] Type in the interval (in minutes) at which the MIM will poll the Broker for Patient List updates and press [Enter].

[6] Press [Retention Period].

[7] Type in the length of time (in hours) that items will remain in the patient list before deleting and press [Enter].

[8] Press [Return] 2 times.

[9] Press [Acquisition].

Checking the HIS/RIS Connection

Important

If the HIS/RIS connection is not functioning, an error message “WORKLIST CONN. TIMEOUT” displays on the “Study Info”

MIM KEYPAD screen.

See “Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection.”

[1] At the “Main Menu” screen on the KEYPAD, press [Acquisition] and then [Study Info].

[2] At the “Study Info” screen, press [Patient List].

[3] Check that the Hospital Administrator makes correct entries for today’s date.

Note

If patient information exists, it appears in the “Patient Info” field.

Troubleshooting the HIS/RIS Gateway Connection

[1] Use the “MIM Service Application” to “ping” the IP Address of the HIS/RIS GATEWAY.

[2] Check that the Station Name is entered correctly. The Station Name is used by the MIM to query the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for Patient Worklist Records.

[3] Check that the Hospital Administrator correctly enters the Patient Records at the HIS/RIS GATEWAY for today’s date.

Disabling the HIS/RIS GATEWAY

Note

This procedure allows you to use “Study Info” or “Patient List” screen on the KEYPAD to stop querying the HIS/RIS Gateway every 2 minutes.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>HIS/RIS Gateway.

[2] Press [Reset]. The IP Address is cleared.

7-70 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option

Setting up the BAR CODE READER

The BAR CODE READER supports the bar code standard 39 used by most HIS/RIS systems and full ASCII decode. The BAR

CODE READER can be configured to work with or without a HIS/RIS system to reduce or eliminate the user entry of patient demographics at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or KEYBOARD.

[1]At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

Note

Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off-line.

[2]To display the “Parameters: Touchscreen Keypad” window, click:

• [Keypad]

• [Modify]

• [OK]

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-71

SERVICE MANUAL

[3]At “Demographic Input Device”, select Bar Code Reader.

[4]Click [Configure].

7-72 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

[5]Based on the customer needs, select the primary field that matches the BAR CODE LABEL at the site. Enter prefix and/or suffix sizes, discriminators, and/or leading zero filter as needed:

Parameter

Primary Field

Description

The demographic field that is used to search the patient list for a matching record. This is also the field that receives scanned data when:

• no discriminator is found.

• the scan was done while in the Acquisition screen.

Range

PATIENT NAME

PATIENT ID

BIRTHDATE

SEX

ACCESSION NUMBER

REFERRING PHYSICIAN

Prefix Size

Suffix Size

Discriminator

Leading Zero Filter

Patient ID

Accession Number

Automatic Search

Date Format Delimiter

• no field is currently selected on the “Study Info” screen.

A prefix filter size for each demographic field. Specifies the number of characters to remove from the front of the received data.

A suffix filter size for each demographic field. Specifies the number of characters to remove from the end of the received data.

Discriminators are characters that you can associate with each piece of patient information (patient name, patient ID, etc.) to tell the BAR CODE READER which type of information you have scanned.

To use discriminators, you must have a symbol(s) or a special character as part of the patient information. You configure the

MIM to read and understand the symbol(s) or special characters when scanned with the BAR CODE READER.

For example, if you associate the character “%” with patient names, the customer can scan the BAR CODE LABEL with the patient name, and the name automatically populates the

Patient Name field. Using discriminators eliminates the need for the customer to highlight the appropriate field before they scan the LABEL.

A leading zero filter switch from Patient ID and Accession

Number. Specifies whether or not to remove leading zeros from the data scanned.

Enable Automatic Search.

A switch for automatic search on the primary demographic field. Enables the automatic search of the local patient list when any bar code data is received for the Primary Field.

The delimiter for date of birth demographic field. Allows variable length day, month, and year.

Note

The birthdate format is determined by the region of the selected language:

• US: mmddyy

0 to N

1 or more characters from the ASCII character set.

On, off

Recommend OFF without

HIS/RIS and ON with

HIS/RIS

None (mmddyy) backslash “/” (mm/dd/yy) hyphen “-” (mm-dd-yy) underscore “_”

(mm_dd_yy) period “.” (mm.dd.yy)

• Europe: ddmmyy

• Asia: yymmdd

[6]Click “Automatic Search” to enable.

[7]To exit, click:

• [OK]

• [Close]

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-73

SERVICE MANUAL

Using the BAR CODE READER with HIS/RIS

[1]At any screen, scan the BAR CODE LABEL. You receive 1 of the following messages:

•1 record found on the local MIM database.

The patient is updated with all the study information. The information is displayed after “NAME:” above “Study

Info”. The record received from the HIS/RIS cannot be edited.

•No matching records were found.

The study information you scanned will be entered, and all additional fields will be blank. You must select [Study

Info] to enter all missing information.

•More than 1 record is found.

The user must select [Study Info], and then select [Patient List] to select the correct record.

[2]To check initial operation, select [Study Info], and verify: a.Correct Information was placed in the Primary Field.

b.Correct information is present.

Using the BAR CODE READER without HIS/RIS

Important

• Before you scan the LABEL, you must highlight the correct field on the “Study Info” screen. When you scan the LABEL, the information is placed in the field you have highlighted. If the site is configured with discriminators, the information will be placed in the field according to the site setup.

• You can only retrieve 1 piece of information from each BAR CODE LABEL, for example, Patient Name or Patient ID.

[1]At any screen, scan the BAR CODE LABEL.

[2]From the “Study Info” field, you can view, edit, or delete the information as necessary.

[3]Complete the 5 required demographic fields.

7-74 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER

Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option

A MODALITY can be set up to store from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD by connecting a cable from the KEYPAD to a switch on the MODALITY. The MODALITY must have a switch available for this purpose. See “Connecting the KEYPAD to the

MODALITY” in Section 3. If the KEYPAD has been connected to the MODALITY, do the following procedure:

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Input>Direct Connect.

Note

Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off line.

[2] To display the “Parameters: Touchscreen Keypad” window, click:

• [Keypad]

• [Modify]

• [OK]

[3] In the “Store Connection” panel, select “Modality.”

[4] Click [OK].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 7-75

SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally blank.

7-76 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Section 8: Obtaining Optimum Images

Introduction

This section includes procedures for obtaining optimum images after initial configuration of the MIM. The procedures apply to images sent to the:

• Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER

• Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / PLUS

• Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER / STANDARD

• Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI-INPUT MANAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER

• Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER

The procedures in this section include:

Creating optimum images for an SCP. Either the “MIM Service Application” or the DISPLAY KEYPAD is used for this procedure.

Creating optimum images for an SCU. Either the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or the PRINT KEYPAD is used for this procedure.

Note

Information on Transfer Function Tables (TFTs) and User Lookup Tables (ULUTs) is provided at the end of this section.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Using the “MIM Service Application” to Create Optimum Images for the SCP

This procedure sets up SCP image processing defaults for all MODALITIES that sends images to a PRINTER through the MIM.

[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM.

[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>SCP Services.

[3] From the “List of Connected SCUs,” select the first SCU and click [Modify].

8-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Figure 8–1

SCP Parameters - Image Optimization

Obtaining Optimum Images

[4] Check the parameters on the Image Optimization Tab and change if necessary. See Table 8–1 on Page 8 – 5 for

recommended parameter values.

[5] Click on the Other Printer Options tab to select the second screen of parameters.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 8–2

SCP Parameters - Other Printer options

[6] Change the parameters if necessary. See Table 8–2 on Page 8 – 6 for recommended parameter values.

[7] Send an image from the SCU to the MIM and PRINTER, and check quality of the image.

[8] Repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each SCU.

8-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Table 8–1 Setting Defaults for the Image Processing Parameters

Selection

Parameter Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS

Services Provided to SCU Select PLUT

Tonescaling Method

TFT/ULUT file

Select Perception LUT*

Select the TFT or ULUT file that applies to MODALITY.*

Does not apply to 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.

ICC Profile

(color compensation)

Contrast (dry)

Does not apply.

Image Dmin

Image Dmax

Type a number from 1 to 15,* except for 8600 and 8610

LASER IMAGER, see note**.

Type 0.0*

Type a number from 1.7 to 3.2 for all, except type

3.5 for 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.*

Modality Type

Body Part

Does not apply.

160, 1120, 2180 LASER

IMAGERS/PRINTER

Select PLUT

Select Curve Shape*

Does not apply.

Type 0.0*

Type a number from 1.7 to 3.2 for

160, 1120, 2180 IMAGERS.

Select correct type.*

Does not apply to 160, 1120, 2180

IMAGERS.*

Does not apply.

Modality Group Type a number from 1 to 11. Applies only to 8600 and 8610

LASER IMAGER. See note***

Does not apply.

Curve Shape

Contrast (wet)

Interpolation Type

Convolution Group

Does not apply.

Select Cubic. Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER

IMAGER.

Type a number from 0 to 11. Applies only to 8600 and 8610

LASER IMAGER.

Type a number from 0 to 69.* 30 is recommended.

Type a number from -5 to +5.

Recommend 0 for DMI.

Select Bilinear, Cubic or

Replicate.*

Does not apply.

Gamma Table Type 0 for Linear in Density. Type 1 for Linear in

Xmittance. Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER

IMAGER.

Does not apply.

Smoothing Type Type a number from 0 to 15 for all.* (1 is recommended for

8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER.)

Select Normal or Reverse.

Type a number from 1 to 15.*

Image Polarity Select Normal or Reverse.

* Selecting Always Apply will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used, not the corresponding parameter from the

SCU.

** For 8600 and 8610: The range is 1-12. Set Contrast to 3 for GE Senographe 200D, 6 for Lorad TDMS, and 3 for Fischer.

*** For 8600 and 8610: Set Modality Group to 6 for GE Senographe 200D, 7 for Lorad TDMS, and 3 for Fischer.

Note

Functions of the image processing parameters are described in Table 8–3 on Page 8 – 6 .

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Table 8–2 Setting Defaults for Status Reporting, Annotation, Printer Parameters, Film and Page Options, and Image

Resizing

Parameter

Status Reporting

Annotation (Common Text)

Elements

Printer Parameters

Film and Page Options

For all Kodak LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS:

For “N-Event Reporting”: Select Send N-Event Reports.*

Default is De-Select for Siemens products. May need be selected for other products.

For “Warning Status”: Select Off or On.* (Default is On).

Select Print Date to display current date on film.*

Select Print Time to display current time on film.*

Select Page Number to display sequential numbers on film.*

Select Hospital Name to display Site/Hospital name field within Service Tracking

Information screen on film.*

Select Modality ID to display a name of the MODALITY on film. Type the name to be displayed the adjacent text box.*

For “Priority”: Select Low, Normal or Stat.*

For “Border”: Select Clear or Black.”*

For “Film Base”: Select Clear Film, Blue Film or Paper.*

For “Film Size”: Select the film size to be used. *

Image Resizing

Text Box Relocation

For “Film Output Destination”: Select Bin 0-9, 969 Processor or 969 Magazine.*

Select Minify/Scale or Crop to resize images.

For “Text Box Relocation”: select Top, Bottom, or None to cut and place text information back in cropped images.

SourceID

Border DMAX

Not adjustable - for information only.

Type a number from 0.00 to 3.99. Note: for the 160, 2180 and 8900 the default border

Dmax = Image Dmax.

* Selecting Always Apply will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used, not the corresponding parameter from the SCU.

Table 8–3 Image Processing Parameter Definitions

PLUT

Parameter

Tonescaling Method

TFT/ULUT file Transfer Function Table/ User Lookup Table File- A set of curves that can be selected according to MODALITY requirements. See the descriptions of TFTS and ULUTs later in this section.

Used with a TFT/ULUT set, this number controls which TFT/ULUT curve will be used.

Contrast (dry)

ICC Profile (CRT1-CRT6) Used with DMI 1200 and 3600 color PRINTERS only. A CRT profile is selected to help the image data match that of the monitor of the MODALITY. As the CRT number is increased, the image darkens. Does not apply to V_6.0.

Image Dmin (0.00-3.98)

Image Dmax (0.01-3.99)

Curve Shape (0.0-69)

Contrast (wet) (-5 to +5)

Descriptions

Presentation Lookup Table - This DICOM standard for tonescaling attribute can be sent by the

SCU to help provide an optimum image. If checked, the SCP will negotiate PLUT Service if requested by the SCU.

Perception LUT - This is a Kodak standard that uses TFT sets to help provide optimum images.

It is used normally with Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS, but can be used also with the 1120 and 2180 LASER IMAGERS.

Curve Shape - This is a Kodak standard that uses curve shape to help provide optimum images.

It is used normally with 1120, 2180, and 160 IMAGERS/PRINTERS.

Indicates the minimum density of the image area of the film. Must be lower than Image Dmax.

Indicates the maximum density of the image area of the film. Must be higher than Image Dmin and cannot be higher than Border Density.

This field allows for a coarse adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR. Curve shape 0 is linear. Increasing the value in this field enhances density differences in the dark areas of the image.

Used with Curve Shape to allow a fine adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR.

8-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Parameter

Modality Type

Body Part

Modality Group (1-11)

Interpolation Type

Convolution (kernel) Group

(0-11)

Gamma Table (0-1)

Descriptions

Selected to help provide an optimum image according to type of MODALITY (CT, MR, etc.).

Used only with 1120 and 2180 IMAGERS/PRINTERS.

Adjusts the image depending on body part. Used only by 1200 and 3600 DMI.

Does not apply to V_6.0 and above.

Used by the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER only. The number selects a ULUT from among a group:

1 = upmsv3kp.w8u

2 = u693c0p.8wu

3 = u713c0p.w8u

4 - gsdfp.w8u

5 = gsdfll0p.w8u

6 = gsdfaa0p.w8u

7-11 - upmsv3kp.w8u

Selected to help provide an optimum image by specifying characteristics of image pixels and image appearance. Options are Cubic, Replicate, Bi-linear, or None. Used only with the 1120 and 2180 PRINTERS.

Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select the smoothing group to be used.

Border DMAX

Smoothing Type (0-15)

Image polarity

Priority

Border

Film Base

Film Size

Film Output Destination

Send N-Event Reports

Warning Status

Annotation (Common Text)

Elements

Image Resizing

Negotiate Color Print

Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select either the Linear in Density (0) or

Linear in Transmittance (1) algorithm.

Limits the maximum density of the image border. Increasing the value increases the maximum density of the image border.

The value must be equal to or greater than the image dmax value.

Selects a “smoothing” value (level of smoothing/sharpness). Used only with Kodak DryView

LASER IMAGERS.

Determines whether image is normal or reversed in polarity.

Determines whether print priority is Low, Normal or Stat (high).

Selects either a Black or Clear image border.

Selects BLUE FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.

Selects a default size for the film.

Indicates film destination: Processor, Magazine, or (for 2180 PRINTER only) Bin 0-9

Enables SCP support of N-Event reporting for this SCU.

Enables or disables PRINTER warning messages to SCU.

Print Date - Prints the date the image file was received.

Print Time - Prints the time the image file was received.

Page Number - Prints page numbers on film.

Hospital Name - Prints the Hospital Name text field entered in the “Service Tracking Menu” of the “MIM Service Application.”

Modality ID - Prints the text entered in the adjacent field.

Image Resizing: The Requested Decimate / Crop DICOM element within DICOM Basic Print is supported and determines if an image should be cropped, minified, or scaled when the size or requested size of the image is greater than the printable area of the film. Images are automatically resized using a combination of Scaling, Minification, and Cropping. An icon is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the film indicating images were resized and the type of resizing method applied.

When enabled, the MIM SCP will attempt to negotiate color print SOP with the SCU.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Parameter

Minify/Scale

Descriptions

Select Minify/Scale to enable both minification and scale reduction and applies the appropriate method, where:

• Minify: reducing the raw physical image to a new smaller physical size maintaining the aspect ratio of the original image (removing pixel data). An image might be minified if the image size is larger than the media in the laser imager.

• Scale: reducing Requested Image Size to a smaller size that can be successfully printed. An image might be scaled if the requested image size cannot be magnified to the full size requested. The full image is printed but the size of the image is reduced to allow it to print on the media that is closest to the requested size.

Crop

Minify/Scale is the default.

Select Crop when using Requested Image Size to remove the image’s perimeter to allow the image to fit on the media and print the same scale as the anatomical area of interest.

Cropping: Removing image data from the outer edges of the image so that it fits on the printable film area maintaining aspect ratio. Cropping allows “true size” printing for larger images. True size printing provides a common scale between images captured on analog systems that use medical x-ray film exposed by phosphor screens in cassettes and printed digital images. The anatomical area of interest is printed at the same size that it is captured on the analog system.

Text Box Relocation

Caution

With cropping, the edges of the image file are removed. If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer image edge, they might be removed from the image when it is printed. Do not use cropping for images with areas of interest near the edges or corners.

Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image.

Caution

• When Top or Bottom is selected, the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image.

If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners, image data might be skewed or obscured if the corner areas are moved. If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner, select None before you print.

• Patient and exam information in any area but the top or bottom corners is not supported.

Depending on the location, the information might be cropped from the image.

8-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD to Set Up Image Parameters for the SCP

[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM.

[2] Press [Menu] on the DISPLAY KEYPAD to display the Main Menu.

[3] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at “Service Menu”.

[4] Press [Menu] to display the Service Menu.

> Exit Menu

Machine Setup Menu

Configuration Menu

Diagnostics Menu

SCP Services

[5] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at “SCP Services”.

[6] Press [Menu]. The screen displays the IP Address and description of each SCU that is connected to the MIM.

> Exit Menu

149.98.202.203 MIM

10.211.23.129 Arrhus_DCP

129.176.155.74 Mayo_DCP

[7] Press [Down Arrow] until the cursor is at the IP Address of the first SCU to be set up.

[8] Press [Menu] to display the “SCP Services” screen.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-9

SERVICE MANUAL

[9] Use the [Down Arrow] or [Up Arrow] key to select parameters to be changed.

Note

For the parameter values that apply to the MODALITY, see Table 8–1 on page Page 8 – 5

and Table 8–2 on Page 8 – 6 . Full

descriptions of the parameters are available in the User Guide for the MIM.

[10] Use the [Arrow] and [Menu] keys to change parameter values when necessary.

Note

If “Always Apply” is set to “Y,” the system values will be used, not the parameter input from the SCU.

[11] After setting the parameter values, send an image from the SCU to the MIM and check quality of the image.

[12] Repeat steps

Step 6 through

Step 11 for each SCU on the list displayed in step

Step 6 .

Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the SCU

For MOD SERVERS, parameters for the images can be set up using the TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD. Complete

procedures are provided in the User Guide for the MIM. Options for parameter values are provided in Table 8–4.

• For a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD: Display the “Keypad Svcs” menu. After making a selection, adjust within the “Imaging

Options” menu.

• For a PRINT KEYPAD: Display the “Machine Setup” menu. After making a selection, adjust within the “Imaging Options” menu.

Table 8–4 SCU Parameters for Images Set by KEYPAD

Parameter

TFT/ULUT

Curve Shape

Contrast

For Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS

TOUCHSCREEN KP

See Note below.

Enter a number from 1 to

PRINT KP

See Note below.

Enter a number from

1 to15

For other Kodak LASER IMAGERS/PRINTERS

TOUCHSCREEN KP PRINT KP

Enter a number from 0 to

6.9

Enter a number from -5 to

Enter a number from 0 to

6.9

Enter a number from -5 to

Dmax

Dmin

Interpolation

Border

Border Dmax

Polarity

Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99

Enter a number from 0.00 to 3.98

Select Curve, Replicate,

Bilinear or None

Select Black or Clear

Enter 3.99

Select Normal or

Reverse

Enter a number from

0.01 to 3.99

Enter a number from

0 to 3.98

Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99

Enter a number from 0.00 to 3.98

Select Curve,

Replicate, Bilinear,

None

Select Curve, Replicate,

Bilinear, None

Select Black or Clear Select Black or Clear

3.99

Select Normal or

Reverse

Enter a number from 0.01 to 3.99

Enter a number from 0 to

3.98

Select Curve, Replicate,

Bilinear, None

Select Black or Clear

Note: Selection varies by MODALITY. See information on TFTs and ULUTs on the following pages.

8-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing - Cropping of Images

When a DICOM modality such as CR or DR uses “requested image size” to send an image to the printer that is beyond the range of the printer, MIM can crop the image so that it fits on the film achieving true size. In some cases, a site may wish to print only some of the films from the modality using true size printing (cropping) and some films without cropping.

Caution

With cropping, the edges of the image file are removed. If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer edge of the image, they might be removed from the image when it is printed. Do not use cropping for images with the areas of interest near the edges or corners.

Important

To set up using both cropping and non cropping, it is necessary to create 2 destinations at the SCU with the same IP address and port, giving 2 unique AE Titles for the destinations. Determine if a customer wants to print using both cropping and non-cropping from a modality.

Setting Up the SCU for Cropping

[1] Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address.

[2] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>SCP Services.

[3] From the “List of Connected SCUs”, select the correct SCU and click [Modify].

[4] Click [Other Printer Options], and select “Crop” under “Image Resizing”.

[5] Check “Always Apply”.

[6] Select “Top” or “Bottom” under “Text Box Relocation” depending on the location of the text, if text on image will be saved and relocated.

[7] Click [OK] to close the SCP Parameters screen.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Text Box Relocation

Important

This procedure needs to be done using pcANYWHERE and the Service Application that resides on the MIM.

Note

You can only relocate text from 2 places on the image.

Caution

When Top or Bottom is selected, the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image. If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners, image data might be skewed or obscured if the corners are moved. If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner, select None before you print.

[1] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select Configure>Text Box Relocation.

The “Configure Text Box Location” screen displays.

8-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

[2] Click [Refresh List] to see all the image sizes that have been sent to the Print Server.

Note

If you know the image size from the modality, and it does not appear in the list, click [Add] to directly add this image size for

Text Box Relocation configuration.

[3] Select an image size in “Columns x Rows”, and click [Modify] to edit Text Box Coordinates.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-13

SERVICE MANUAL

[4] Click [View Image] to view an image in MIM.

[5] Select the appropriate image, and click [Open].

8-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

[6] Move your mouse to the Text Area for the text box that you are relocating.

• Click to zoom an area of interest.

• Click and drag to select an area of interest and zoom.

Obtaining Optimum Images

Note

If you increase the image size too much and you can no longer determine coordinates, right-click to get the original image size.

[7] Position the mouse over the top left corner and bottom right corner of each text box and record the coordinates. The coordinates are displayed in “Pixel Value” by row and column.

[8] Enter the parameters in the “Configuration Text Box Coordinates” window.

a. At “Text Box Location” select “Top” or “Bottom”.

b. Type the values for the first text box in the “Left Text Box Coordinates”.

c. Type the values for the second text box in the “Right Text Box Coordinates”.

[9] Click [OK] to close “Configuration Text Box Coordinates”.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-15

SERVICE MANUAL

Transfer Function Table (TFT) Sets and User Lookup Tables (ULUTs)

References

This information is designed to help in the selection of the correct TFT set or ULUT during the process of image optimization.

• MPC (Maintenance Software Package) TFT Help file for LASER IMAGERS

• KHI Documentation Database (USLN331/US/EKC/IOL Product Info)

• TFTSV3.4 T S.Rev6.document

• meta_ULUTs.document

Definitions

Note

Do not confuse a TFT set with a TFT. Image quality is significantly affected by the single, specific TFT that was used in making a print. Image quality is totally unaffected by the other TFTs in the set. The TFT set is simply a container, and all of its contents may not be useful or correct for a given MODALITY or a given density setting. In fact, some TFT sets are quite diverse. They offer a wide variety of looks within a single set of 15 TFTs. Some TFTs in a given TFT set may be completely unacceptable to a customer for a specific MODALITY, while one may be just right. That is, it is preferable to any other TFT in any other TFT set.

TFT: A table (curve) used in closed-loop Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS that relates each digital input value to a corresponding target value of perceived brightness.

TFT Set: A set of 15 TFTs that represent 15 different curve shapes, each of which is associated with a corresponding userselectable contrast selection (1-15).

Contrast: A user-selectable setting from 1 through 15 on the LASER IMAGER that initiates the associated TFT for the current print.

Density: A user-selectable setting that determines the maximum density (Dmax) used in printing.

ULUT: The tables, or curves, that are used in Kodak DryView 8300, 8600, and 8610 LASER IMAGERS.

Selecting TFT Sets

When selecting a TFT for a given MODALITY, first try the contrast and density settings for the TFT set suggested in the following table. The selections shown there are recommended for the majority of users. Other selections are useful in certain situations, depending on radiologist preference, etc.

When determining with the customer which TFT set to select, it is important to print using all of the available TFTs, by using all 15 contrast settings or doing one contrast test film. It is equally important to note the specific contrast setting (i.e., the specific

TFT) and the TFT set that best satisfies the customer. Similar or identical individual TFTs may occur in multiple TFT sets. For example, in VER693C0, the popular perceived linear TFT 6 is essentially the same as TFT 9 of PMSV3K and is also similar to

TFT 8 of C3B5AX4. Where more than one TFT set contains a TFT that is satisfactory to the customer, deciding which set to install should be based on the set that gives the customer more usable choices on a contrast test.

8-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

AutoRad Workstation

(typical)

AutoRad Workstation

(others)

MODALITY

CT (typical)

CT (others)

DSA (typical)

DSA (others)

Fuji CR through 2210

CREIB or Analogic SD100

MR (typical)

MR (others)

TFT Set

VER693C0

C3B5AX4

WKSTN2A

VER693C0

VER713C0

SIECT87B

PMSV3K

VER693C0

VER713C0

VER723C0

VER713C0

PMSV3K

VER713C0

C3B5AX4

SFH301A4

SIEFL87B

FCR302C4

VER693C0

VER713C0

SIEMR87B

PMSV3K

VER693C0

AIRIS2A

Nuclear Medicine (typical) VER713C0

Nuclear Medicine (others): PMSV3K

MAXXUS

WRKSTN2A

B3C5AX4

Philips Easyvision

Philips Thoravision

Philips V3000/V4000

Picker Digital Reconstructed

Radiography (DRR)

Siemens Camera Server (Set to output linear-in-density)

VER693C0

WRKSTN2A

8E8820 – NOV 2003

7-8

PMSV3K

B3C5AX4

PMSV3K

6-8

8-12

Set to density

(1-15)

Contrast (TFT#) Density

6 3.0

Comments

Limited experience

6 or higher

3.0

Limited experience

GE Workstation with AutoRad BOARD

(limited experience)

Most CR’s (Kodak CR800, Agfa VIPs, Kodak

CR400): MagType = cubic; smoothing = 5; local PRINTER set for 12-bit

Head and body 3.0

3.0

2.8

Head and body

For Siemens, Europe. Contrast setting has little effect

Philips 3.0

2-8 Elscint

2.9-3.0 Picker PQ

GE CTi

2.7-3.0

2.9

3.0

GE DF5000 DSA

Philips DSI

3.0

2.9

ATS Dig. Fluoro

Siemens Fluorospot H (developed for HQ)

3.0

2.8

3.0

2.6

Siemens Fluorospot DSA

Picker MR

Lunar Arthroscan

For Siemens, Europe. Contrast setting has little effect

Philips Gyroscan

Elscint

Hitachi Airis

3.0

2.2

1.9

2.3

3.0

2.8

YMS (bone)

YMS (SPECT)

Toshiba. Limited experience

Picker (Limited Experience)

3.0

Note that TFTs 1-8 are designed for densities of 3.2 - 1.8, respectively

8-17

SERVICE MANUAL

MODALITY

Siemens Camera Server

(Others)

TFT Set

SIEWS87B

Contrast (TFT#) Density

3 2.8

10 3.0

Comments

A slight modification to WRKSTN2A, to match Siemens Sienet WS test requirements in

Europe

Equivalent To PMSV3K Siemens Polytron (TOP interface)

Ultrasound (typical)

Ultrasound (others):

SIEPOLY

PMSV3K

8-13

9 (depends on radiologist)

2.4-2.8

2.4 - 2.8 Acuson Ultrasound

2.4

GE Ultrasound

Toshiba Ultrasound

TFT Set Descriptions

The following are the TFT set choices available for use with 969, 8500, 8700, 8100, and 8200 LASER IMAGER and 8800

MULTI-INPUT MANAGER applications.

AIRIS2A: Designed to meet Hitachi requirements for a TFT set which, when used for printing on Kodak DryView films, can perceptually match films printed on a 969 HQ (wet) LASER IMAGER when TFT Set VER693C0 (with Contrast=6 and

Dmax=3.0) is used in the HQ.

To accomplish this, the AIRIS2A TFT Set is designed for overall similarity to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but provides slightly lower measured densities in the darker part of the density range. Specifically, in the AIRIS2A Set, the Contrast=8 TFT is designed to provide dry prints which perceptually match the Contrast=6 wet prints made using VER693C0 on an HQ, with

Dmax=3.0 for both prints.

The plots of this TFT Set (see the chart below) show that all 15 of the tables have the same mid-tone brightness, with varying degrees of an S-shape which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 12 and the strongest mid-tone contrast to

Table 15. Note that this TFT Set provides a narrower range of curves than the VER693C0.

8-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

B3C5AX4: Allows moderate departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 2, 5, 8, 11 and 14 roughly cover the span of

VER693C0. The remaining curves provide more mid-tone brightness choices (curves 1, 4, 7, 10, and 13 = the brightest, and curves 3, 6, 9, 12, and 15 = the darkest). In all, there are 5 mid-tone contrast choices for each of 3 mid-tone brightness choices

The plots on the chart show the two-dimensional brightness/contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set. The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 (horizontally) x 5 (vertically) contrast test film is printed, the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from left to right and increasing mid-tone contrast going from top to bottom on the film.

C3B5AX4: Allows moderate-to-strong departures from the basic VER693C0 curves. Curves 7 through 9 cover roughly the span of VER693C0 and the remaining curves provide more choices of mid-tone brightness: Curves 1 through 3 = the brightest, and curves 13 through 15 = the darkest. In all, there are 3 mid-tone contrast choices for each of 5 mid-tone brightness choices.

The plots on the chart show the two-dimensional brightness/contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set. The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 (horizontally) x 5 (vertically) contrast test film is printed, the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from top to bottom and decreasing mid-tone contrast going from left to right on the film.

FCR302C4: Created specifically for use with the 3M Model 2210 CREIB interface to a Fuji Computed Radiography system.

This TFT set should not be used for any other application. The 15 TFTs in this set are designed to be used in correspondence with the 15 Dmax choices of the IMAGER (using Contrast 1 when the first Dmax setting is used, etc.). The plots in the chart

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-19

SERVICE MANUAL

below show a sagging shape, which is characteristic of a “linear in density” behavior, until maximum brightness (Dmin) is approached, at which point the curves become relatively flat.

8-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

GEHYB01: A hybrid (multi-MODALITY) TFT set that supports the various imaging MODALITIES which may be connected to a GE (Amber) Workstation. These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography (CR), CT, MR, Ultrasound and any

MODALITY that expects a linear-in-density PRINTER. The following table defines how the 15 TFTs can best be applied to the various MODALITIES supported by this TFT Set.

Contrast Setting

(TFT No.)

Application

Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.6

Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.7

Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.8

Fuji CR, with Dmax = 2.9

Fuji CR, with Dmax = 3.0

Linear in Density, Dmax = 2.6

Ultrasound (highest mid-tone brightness)

Ultrasound (moderate mid-tone brightness)

Ultrasound, CT or MR

CT or MR

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-21

SERVICE MANUAL

GSDF0: A TFT set in which all 15 curves are designed to conform to the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function as applied to the case of transmissive film media under certain typical conditions. For optimum conformity with the standard, select the contrast setting in this TFT set based upon the Dmax density setting in the following table:

2.7

2.8

2.9

3.0

3.1

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

Dmax

1.7

1.8

1.9

2.0

2.1

2.2

Optimum Contrast Setting

8-22 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

HYB60516: A hybrid (multi-MODALITY) TFT set that supports the diverse needs of several imaging MODALITIES, such as may be operating within a Lockheed (formerly Loral) network. These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography (CR),

Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA or DSI), C-Arm applications, CT, MR, Ultrasound and Nuclear Medicine. The following table defines how these 15 individual TFTs can best be applied to the needs of various imaging modalities supported by this TFT set.

Imaging MODALITY Suitable Dmax Range

HYB60516 Applications

Preferred Dmax

Fuji CR

DSI (DSA)

C-Arm

Ultrasound

Nuclear Medicine

2.7 - 3.0

3.0

2.5

2.3

3.0

2.5

2.3

Suitable TFTs

(Contrast Settings)

4-7

1-4

2-7

1-7

3, 5-7, 11-15

Preferred TFT

(Contrast Setting)

MAXXUS: Created specifically for use with the YMS SPECT to match Konica film. All 15 curves are very close to a single curve. The MAXXUS TFT Set provides a set of tables suitable for certain nuclear medicine applications, specifically, to provide a relatively flat (low contrast) curve shape in the brightest portions of an image. This minimizes the visibility of soft tissue in a bone nuclear medicine image in which bone is printed as black on a white background. This is a relatively tight TFT set, offering limited variation with contrast setting.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-23

SERVICE MANUAL

MSFDUP1: Designed to meet the density printing requirements of a TFT-based LASER IMAGER for Kodak that is used as the

PRINTER in a DUPLICATOR for Kodak equipped with a MULTI-SHEET FEEDER. The 15 individual TFTs of this TFT set are designed to map 15 different Dmin and Dmax nominal input ranges (original film) into the full density range of the imager

(approximately 0.2 to 3.1, for Kodak DryView Blue film).

Example: If the original film is a blue-based film from a LASER IMAGER, with a film Dmin of about 0.2 and a printed Dmax of about 3.0, a reasonable contrast setting for duplicating this film would be 11. However, since these input density ranges are approximate, other “similar” settings (6 in this example) could give optimal results from a user perspective. Refer to the following table of nominal contrast settings

Dmin

~ 0.05

~ 0.12

~ 0.20

Dmax ~ 3.0

C = 1

C = 6

C = 11

Nominal Contrast Settings*

Dmax ~ 3.2

C = 2

C = 7

C = 12

* For various original film density ranges.

Dmax ~ 3.4

C = 3

C = 8

C = 13

Dmax ~3.6

C = 4

C = 9

C = 14

Dmax ~ 3.8

C = 5

C = 10

C = 15

8-24 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

PMSB: Developed as a slight modification to the PMSV3K TFT Set that was previously developed for Philips Medical Systems.

This set was created by adjusting the t-values within the PMSV3K TFT Set so that when using Contrast 9 of the PMSB TFT Set match, the densities print, as accurately as possible, the latest target densities requested by Philips Medical Systems. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone contrast (slope), but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1

= the darkest image and contrast setting 15 = the brightest.

PMSV3K: A set of non-S-curve TFTs, with mid-tone density gradually decreasing as the TFT number (contrast setting) is increased. This set was originally requested by Philips Medical Systems who preferred saggy curve shapes to the S-shaped curves of VER693C0 and VER713C0. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone contrast (slope), but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1 = the darkest image and contrast setting 15 = the brightest.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-25

SERVICE MANUAL

SFH301A4: Composed of 15 non-S-curve curves, designed specifically for the Siemens Fluorospot H system. The plots on the chart below show a shape that is approximately “linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.

SIECT87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for CT. The following plots of this TFT

Set show a shape which is close to a “linear in brightness” shape and quite similar to the slightly S-shaped middle TFTs of the

VER693C0 TFT Set. But unlike the VER693C0 Set, this TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user, but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible.

8-26 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

SIECT87B: A slight modification to the SIECT87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for CT.

SIEFC969: Designed to satisfy the requirements of Siemens for use with the Fluorospot Compact MODALITY. The t-values in this TFT Set are similar to the values defined for the SFH301A4 TFT Set, but the SIEFC969 values have been adjusted to optimally meet the needs of the Fluorscope Compact. The t-value plots below show a shape that is approximately ”linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-27

SERVICE MANUAL

SIEFL87B: A slight modification to the SFH301A4 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot DSA. The t-value plots below show a shape that is approximately ”linear in brightness,” with the different minimum t-values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values.

SIEFL87C: A slight modification to the SIEFL87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the latest Siemens requirements for the Fluorospot DSA.

8-28 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

SIEFLTOP: A slight modification to the SIEWS87B TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot Top systems.

SIEMR87: A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single, Siemens-defined curve for MR. The t-value plots in the chart below show a shape which is somewhat like a “linear in brightness” shape, but with more undulations than the slightly S-shaped middle TFTs of the VER693C0 TFT Set. As with the SIECT87 TFT Set, the SIEMR87 TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user, but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-29

SERVICE MANUAL

SIEMR87B: A slight modification to the SIEMR87 TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for MR.

SIEPOLY: Equivalent to the PMSV3K TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for

Siemens Polytron/8700 installations.

8-30 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

SIEWS87B: A slight modification to the WRKSTN2A TFT Set, designed to match, as closely as possible, the Siemens requirements for the Sienet Workstation.

TLII: Created for use with the Toshiba Laser Imager Interface (TLII) for nuclear medicine applications. It provides several linear-in-density curves (5 with increasing density plus 5 with decreasing density). It also provides 5 approximately linear-inbrightness curves, similar to some of the VER693C0 curves, for an MR MODALITY (Toshiba Flexart). The combination of diverse curve shapes in this TFT Set, for different MODALITIES, makes it an example of a hybrid TFT Set.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-31

SERVICE MANUAL

VER693C0: A popular, general-purpose TFT set of S-shaped curves, widely used for CT, MR and certain other modalities.

Curve 6 of this set is designed to be linear-in-perceived-brightness. Contrast settings below 6 give increased contrast (slope) near the endpoints and decreased “mid-tone” (near 50% of digital input) contrast. Contrast settings above 6 give decreased contrast near the endpoints and increased mid-tone contrast. The following plots of this TFT Set show that all 15 of the tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, with varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.

VER703C0: Created to provide a set of S-shaped curve choices that are intermediate-in-perceived- brightness, i.e., between those of VER693C0 TFT Set and those of VER713C0 TFT Set. All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, which is slightly brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the VER693C0 tables and slightly darker than the mid-tone brightness of the VER713C0 TFT Set. As with the VER693C0 and VER713C0 TFT Sets, there are varying degrees of an Sshape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.

VER713C0: Nearly as popular as the VER693C0 Set, with a somewhat lower mid-tone density than the VER693C0 Set. This set is similar to the VER693C0 TFT Set, but with a slight increase in brightness (i.e., the VER713C0 TFT Set can be

8-32 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

characterized as having slightly lower “mid-tone density” than the VER693C0 TFT Set). All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid-tone brightness, which is noticeably brighter than the mid-tone brightness of the VER693C0 tables. As with the

VER693C0 TFT Set, there are varying degrees of an S-shape contribution which gives the strongest end-points contrast (slope) to Table 1 and the strongest mid-tone contrast (slope) to Table 15.

VER723C0: Designed to offer another choice of curves, similar to the S-shaped curves of VER713C0, but at a brightness higher than VER713C0 (which, in turn, is brighter than VER703C0, which is brighter than VER693C0). This choice is needed at certain customer sites (e.g., at GE CT-I sites where higher brightness is desired for mid-brain gray/white matter and/or abdominal soft tissue).

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-33

SERVICE MANUAL

WRKSTN2A: Designed for post-processing imaging workstations in which curves 1 through 8 are designed to produce linear in optical density results on film, for density settings of 3.2 through 1.8, respectively. Curves 9 through 11 are the same as

VER693C0 curves 6 through 8. Curves 12 through 14 are designed for film digitizer applications. Curve 15 is the same as curve

8-34 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER

The following are the set choices available when using the ULUT set for 8300 LASER IMAGER applications.

GSDF6: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, with parameters chosen to support the range of density (Dmax) settings available on the 8300 LASER IMAGER. The curves are designed so the contrast and density (Dmax) settings should be chosen according to the following table:

Recommended Contrast Settings

Maximum Density

See Note 1.

Recommended Contrast Setting

See Note 2.

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.7

2.9

2.6

10 3.1

3.3

3.5

1. As controlled by density setting.

2. For best conformance with Grayscale Standard Display Function.

GSDF6AA0: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an 8300

LASER IMAGER printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All the curves in this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2 and an assumed light box luminance of 5500 cd/sq.m. The variable parameter in this family of curves is the assumed reflected ambient light for the different contrast settings. The following table shows the values used.

Assumed Reflected Ambient Light Values

Contrast Setting Assumed Reflected Ambient

Light (cd/sq.m)

1 5.5

16.5

27.5

38.5

49.5

60.5

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-35

SERVICE MANUAL

GSDF6LL0: Composed of 12 curves, all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function, applied to an 8300 LASER

IMAGER printing at its highest density setting (Dmax = 3.5). All of the curves in this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0.2. In this family of curves (see the following table), the assumed light box luminance was set to different values for the different contrast settings, and, at each contrast setting, the reflected ambient light was set to be 0.5% of the light box luminance of that setting.

Assumed Light Box Luminance Values

Contrast Setting Assumed Light Box

Luminance (cd/sq.m)

1 2000

2210

2442

2699

2982

3295

3641

4024

4447

4914

5430

6000

LORAD03: A moderately “tight” ULUT set, intended for printing Lorad digital mammography images using an 8300 LASER

IMAGER in linear-in-transmittance 1/3 gamma mode. All of the curves of this ULUT set are close to each other and close to a single, central curve (curve 6), which was designed to provide printed densities that match as closely as possible a table of target densities desired by Lorad in order to match the density-vs-input characteristics of an Agfa printer. The table of densities (i.e., as measured on an Agfa film) is as follows:

Desired Densities vs. Step Numbers

Step Number Desired Optical Density

3.65

2.67

2.17

1.82

1.54

1.31

1.13

0.97

0.84

0.70

0.59

0.49

0.41

0.32

0.25

0.20

0.16

8-36 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

The desired densities are converted into desired t-values (for the “central” curve 6) by the WARP15 program import function.

In an actual 8610 print, t-values are mapped into the available density range of the 8300 LASER IMAGER (i.e., from approximately 0.20 film Dmin to approximately 3.5 using the highest density 8300 setting). A small range of brightness is provided in this ULUT set. Brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 through 12.

LORAD04: Similar to the LORAD03 ULUT Set that was created for Lorad, but with one difference. In the LORAD03 ULUT

Set, curve 12 is the brightest of all 12 ULUTs in the relatively tight set. In the LORAD04 ULUT Set, curve 12 is linear (i.e., a straight line). As a result, in the LORAD04 ULUT Set, curve 12 (contrast setting 12) can be used on an 8300 LASER IMAGER that is set to linear-in-density gamma mode to print images with a linear-in-density overall response.

SIECT83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their CT systems.

There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set. Curves 1, 4, 7, and 10 give a slightly lowered mid-tone brightness. Curves 2, 5, 8, and 11 give the nominal or target mid-tone brightness, and curves 3, 6, 9, and 12 give a slightly elevated mid-tone brightness. Within each of these three groups, the mid-tone contrast increases very slightly as the contrast setting is increased (e.g., from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11).

SIEMR83C: A “tight” ULUT set, with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single, central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match, as accurately as possible, a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their MR systems.

U1_109B: The original standard ULUT set for the 8300 LASER IMAGER. A recommended replacement for this ULUT set is the newer ULUT Set, U1_109S described below.

This ULUT Set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging MODALITIES. Its

12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid-tone brightnesses and 3 S-shaped curves at each of 2 mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images.

The number order of the curves (tables) in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested that yields 2 films with 3 columns of 2 images on each film, the first film shows the 6 images printed from upper left to lower right using the 6 saggy curves. On the second film, the left column shows the images printed using the first group of 3 S-curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of 3 S-curves. For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These curves are often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with MODALITIES such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-37

SERVICE MANUAL

Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set (see the graph below). A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.

Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a lower midtone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.

Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either midtone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be useful primarily as a “finder” set, to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed

(e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).

U1_109S: Like the U1_109B ULUT Set it replaces, this set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging modalities. Its 12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid-tone brightnesses, and

3 S-shaped curves at each of 2 mid-tone brightnesses. The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images, while the S-shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images.

The U1_109S ULUT Set is a nearly identical replacement for the previously described U1_109B TFT Set. Whereas U1_109B had some tables that only reached 1020 instead of the full maximum scale value of 1023, all the tables of U1_109S do reach the maximum scale value. Therefore, printed densities can reach the lowest possible Dmin.

For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6. These curves are often preferred over S-shaped curves by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear medicine.

Curves 7, 9, and 11 of this set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a higher mid-tone brightness than curves 8, 10, and 12 of this ULUT set.

Curves 8, 10, and 12 of this set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set. A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid-tone contrast in this group of 3, while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid-tone contrast. These 3 curves have a lower mid-tone brightness than curves 7, 9, and 11 of this ULUT set.

8-38 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes, with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either midtone brightness or mid-tone contrast, this set may be primarily useful as a “finder” set, to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice, within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous, intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed

(e.g., UPMSV3K, U693C0, or U713C0).

U693C0: Consists of “S-shaped” variations about a linear-in-perceived-brightness response. For this ULUT set, all curves intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid-tone brightness.

As the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased. This ULUT set is very suitable for CT, MR, and C-Arm applications and is also sometimes useful for nuclear medicine applications.

U713C0: Consists of S-shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear-in-perceivedbrightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set. As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, all curves of this set also intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, but the mid-tone brightness of the curves in this set is somewhat higher than the mid-tone brightness of the

U693C0 ULUT Set.

As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12, the mid-tone contrast (i.e., the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale) is increased, while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased.

This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for ultrasound, nuclear medicine and DSA. It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-39

SERVICE MANUAL

UPMSV3K: A relatively wide-ranging set of saggy curves. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1-6 of the U1_109S (or U1_109B) ULUT Set. This set is widely used in applications including ultrasound, nuclear medicine, and others where an S-shaped response curve is not desired.

For these curves, overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12. The brighter curves in this set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine.

WKSTN83A: Most of the curves in this set are designed to give a linear-in-density response, while the remaining curves are designed to give an approximately linear-in-perceived-brightness response. This is assuming that in both cases, the subsequent gamma table processing in the imager is of the linear-in-transmittance 1/3 type, as is always the case in the 8300 LASER

IMAGER.

Because of its linear-in-density curves, this ULUT set can be used, even on an 8300 LASER IMAGER, with certain

MODALITIES or workstations (e.g., Toshiba nuclear medicine or some Siemens workstations) that are designed to work with an IMAGER that has a linear-in-density characteristic. Overall this ULUT set offers the choices shown below:

The linear in density in this ULUT Set are associated with contrast settings of 1 through 8 as shown below.

The best curve (contrast setting) to use to obtain a linear-in-density response depends on the current Dmax density setting, as indicated in the following table.

8-40 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Obtaining Optimum Images

Preferred Pairings of Density and Contrast Settings (See Note 1

Density Setting Contrast Setting for Linearin-Density Response

15,16 1

13,14

11,12

9,10

7,8

5,6

3,4

1,2 8

1. When using linear-in-density curves from WKSTN83A on an 8300

LASER IMAGER operating in linear-in-transmittance 1/3 mode.

When you choose the contrast setting from this table, the density printed by an 8300 LASER IMAGER should decrease in approximately equal steps of Optical Density as the digital input is increased by a given step size.

The approximate linear-in-brightness curves in this ULUT set are obtained at Contrast settings of 9 through 12. As the Contrast setting is increased from 9 to 11, mid-tone contrast is increased slightly while the contrast in the near-black and near-white portions of the image is decreased slightly. Curve 12 is a repeat of curve 9. For further details on these U693C0-type curves, see the description of the U693C0 ULUT Set.

ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER

The current MODALITY (Contrast Table) Groups, contained in the file “Luts86-G5B-1.txt,” include the following 11 ULUT sets.

Group 1, UPMSV3K: A relatively wide-ranging set of saggy curves. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1-6 of the U1_109S (or U1_109B) ULUT Set. This set is widely used in applications including Ultrasound, nuclear medicine, and others where an S-shaped response curve is not desired.

Group 2, U693C0: Consists of “S-shaped” variations about a linear-in-perceived-brightness response. For this ULUT set, all curves intersect at the 50% point of maximum input, meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid-tone brightness.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 8-41

SERVICE MANUAL

Group 3, U713C0: Consists of S-shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear-inperceived-brightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set. As with the U693C0 ULUT Set, all curves of this set also intersect at the

50% point of maximum input, but the mid-tone brightness of the curves is somewhat higher than the mid-tone brightness of the

U693C0 ULUT Set.

This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for Ultrasound, nuclear medicine and DSA. It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired.

Group 4, GSDFP - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-min of 0.2, a lightbox luminance of 2000 cd/sq.m., and an ambient light fraction of 0.005. "Light fraction" is the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film, expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance. For this

ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is D-max. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the D-max parameter goes through the following sequence of values: 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.9, 3.1,

3.3, 3.5.

Group 5, GSDFLL0P - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-max of 3.5 and a D-min of 0.2. For this ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is the measured luminance of the lightbox in cd/sq.m. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the luminance is varied through the following sequence of values: 2000, 2210, 2442, 2699, 2982, 3295, 3641, 4024, 4447, 4914,

5430, 6000 cd/sq.m., respectively.

Group 6, GSDFAA0P - All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function, parameterized with a D-max of 3.5, a D-min of 0.2, and a lightbox luminance of 5500 cd/sq.m. For this ULUT Set, the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is the ambient light fraction, i.e., the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film, expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance. As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12, the ambient light fraction parameter goes through the following sequence of values: .001, .002, .003, .004, .005, .006, .007, .008, .009, .010,

.011, .012.

Groups 7 through 11 - These include the UPMS3VK set.

8-42 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Completing the Installation

Section 9: Completing the Installation

Introduction

This section includes procedures for installing a:

• Kodak LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

The procedures include:

Saving the setup

Checking MIM basic functions

Training the customer

Sending service feedback through SCAN

Final Procedures

[1] After setting up the SYSTEM, save the setup on a DISKETTE and store it in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM.

[2] From the “MIM Service Application,” make some test images: select Diagnostics>System.

[3] If necessary for this site, use the KEYPAD or Autofilming Link to store some clinical images.

[4] Make some prints to the destination and check the image quality.

[5] For PRINT SERVERS: print a grayscale test image.

[6] Set the MIM for Remote Service. See Section 2, Tools.

[7] Have the TSC check that the MODEM operates correctly.

[8] Provide the TSC with the MODEM number.

[9] For a MIM 100 and MIM 200 with a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD, do the Customer Profile. See the User Guide for the

MIM.

Note

For each interface for the MIM, insert the User Guide for the interface in the site User Guide. Each interface has a section (e.g.,

KEYPAD). Use the tab dividers in the binder for the User Guide.

[10] Enable or disable the Privacy feature according to the customer’s request and verify operation of the Privacy functions.

[11] Train the customer.

[12] For an unqualified MODALITY only, send the FILM MAILER (Mod 1) with test films enclosed.

[13] Provide feedback for your service time.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Training the Operator and Key Operator

General

The FE installing the MIM must instruct the customer’s operators, key operator and, if the Privacy Feature is used, the customer’s

Security Administrator. Use the attached “Proficiency Checklist” to check that all necessary topics are reviewed with the customer.

Objectives

At the end of the first 4 Modules, the Operator should be able to do the following:

• Describe a MIM and some of its benefits and features.

• Identify components of the MIM.

• Energize the MIM, start and shut down the software application, and de-energize the MIM.

• Operate the KEYPAD.

• Understand when to use the main screens of the KEYPAD.

• Select a profile.

• Change imaging options.

• Store and make images.

• Do image transfer.

• Make or edit a profile.

At the end of the first 6 Modules, the Key Operator should be able to do all of the Operator tasks and the following:

• Adjust Tone Scaling.

• Maintain the MIM.

• Make a back up of the SYSTEM setup.

• Set the SYSTEM time.

• Troubleshoot simple problems and ask for service, if necessary.

• Clean the KEYPAD and FILTER.

9-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Completing the Installation

Training Modules

The training time is:

• Operator - 60 minutes

• Key Operator - 90 minutes

Module

1. Overview:

• Overview of the User Guide

– Chapter Layout

– Appendices

• What is the MIM?

– Introducing the MIM

– Benefits and Features

• Components

– SYSTEM Setup

– COMPUTER

– KEYPAD

– FOOTSWITCH or MINI KEYPAD

– BULKHEAD

– POWER SWITCH and CORD

– Power On LED

– FAN

2. Basic Operations

• Turning on the MIM

• Shutting Down the MIM

• Using the KEYPAD

• Privacy Feature - UserName and Password, functions protected by the Privacy Feature

• Selecting and Entering Information

• Overview of the Main Screens

• Setting SYSTEM Preferences

3. Working with Images:

• Choosing a Profile

• Adjusting Imaging Options

• Storing Images

• Deleting Images and Pages

• Printing the Page

• Managing Image Transfer

Duration

5 minutes

Key/Basic Operator

Operator / Key Operator

20 minutes Operator / Key Operator

25 minutes Operator / Key Operator

8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Module

4. Creating and Managing Profiles:

• Understanding Profiles

• Planning Profiles

• Viewing Profiles

• Creating Profiles

• Editing Profiles

• Renaming Profiles

• Deleting Profiles

5. Tone Scaling:

• Overview

• Tone Scaling Options

• Selecting Tone Scaling Options

• Adjusting Tone Scaling Options

6. Maintaining the MIM

• Backing Up the SYSTEM Setup

• Setting the SYSTEM Time

• Troubleshooting

– Viewing SYSTEM Information

– Viewing Error Logs

– Sending Test Images

• Care and Maintenance

– Cleaning the KEYPAD

– Removing and cleaning the FILTER

Duration Key/Basic Operator

10 minutes Operator / Key Operator

15 minutes Key Operator

9-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Operator Training Checklist for the MIM

Overview

Identify Components

Basic Operations

Turn On/Shut Down

Privacy Feature - Username and Password

Select and Enter Information using the KEYPAD

Use the Screens: Acquisition, Main, Imaging Options, and Manage Profiles

Set SYSTEM Preferences

Working with Images

Choose a profile

Adjust imaging options

Store images

Delete images and pages

Print the page

Manage image transfer

Creating and Managing Profiles

Plan the profile

View the profile

Create the profile

Edit and Rename the profile

Delete the profile

Tone Scaling- Key Operator

Tone Scaling options

Select the Tone Scaling option

Adjust the Tone Scaling option

Maintaining the MIM - Key Operator

Make a Back Up of the SYSTEM Setup

Set the SYSTEM time

View the SYSTEM information and error logs

Send a test image

Clean the KEYPAD

Clean the FILTER

Signatures

Technologist:

Apps. Con.

Date:

Completing the Installation

8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Training the Security Administrator

If the customer uses the privacy feature added to MIM products in V_6.0 and above, the customer must appoint a security administrator who is responsible for setting up user accounts for operators and key operators.

Training Outline:

• Enabling the privacy feature

• Accessing the “Security Administrator Console”

• Entering “System Settings”

“Password Rules”

“Login Rules”

“Privacy Warning Notice”

• Entering Device Information

• Adding users

• Editing user information

• Changing the Security Administrator password

• Logging off the “Security Administrator Console”

• Enabling/disabling Kodak Service Access

• Backing up the MIM configuration after changing the Security Administrator password or Operator passwords.

Note

Setting up user accounts and training key operators on the log in procedures is the responsibility of the Security Administrator.

Leave Publication 8E9002 SECURITY AND PRIVACY FEATURES with the Security Administrator. This manual serves as training reference and detailed user guide for the privacy features.

9-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Completing the Installation

Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified MODALITIES

The Mod 1 FILM MAILER is a pre-paid, addressed, express mailer for use when servicing the MIM 100 or the MIM 200 for an unqualified MODALITY.

Important

Include the following items in the Mod 1 FILM MAILER:

• 2 clinical images from the MODALITY that you have printed using the MIM.

• One test print from the PRINTER.

• The “MODALITY Parameter Worksheet,” with any changes documented.

Providing Service Feedback

SCAN Feedback

Refer to the Service Reporting Guide to find the proper feedback codes for the tasks you completed during the MIM installation.

Use the codes in Table 9–1 to complete the feedback.

Use the codes in to complete service feedback.

• Send the installation time using the XN code.

• Send the troubleshooting time using the RAM code.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 9-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Service Codes

Table 9–1 MIM Product Service Codes

MIM 200

MIM 100

25 PS

Product

NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

VIDEO 150 INPUT PACKAGE

VIDEO 150LC INPUT PACKAGE

VIDEO 60 INPUT PACKAGE

DIGITAL INPUT PACKAGE

MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE

COPCIL INTERFACE

FOPCIL INTERFACE

COMMON PROTOCOL OPTICAL

INTERFACE

NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD

Group

Code

TBD

2551

Service

Code Notes

1539 Serialized Mainframe

3433 Serialized Mainframe

3754 Serialized Mainframe

1547 Used for 160 LASER IMAGER

3467 NSA for MIM 100

4399 SA for MIM 100, NSA for MIM 200

3743 SA for MIM 200

3468 SA for MIM

3469 SA for MIM 200

3469 SA for MIM 200 and 25 PS

3746 NSA for 1120 AND 2180 LASER PRINTERS

1532 SA for MIM 200 in Western Europe

9-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Conversions

Section 10: Conversions

Converting Optical Interface to Fiber Optic Interface for MIM 200

Important

This conversion is only supported on the MIM 200 on the 2.4 GHz and 1 GHz enclosures.

[1] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination.” The “Installed Destination Window” displays.

[2] From the “Installed Destination” window, highlight the KELP 2180 or KELP 1120 destination and select “Delete.”

Note

The 2180 or 1120 must be removed as a destination from any referenced profiles before it can be deleted.

[3] Exit the “MIM Service Application.”

[4] De-energize the MIM.

Warning

Dangerous Voltage.

[5] Disconnect the main power for the MIM.

[6] Remove the side COVER for the MIM.

[7] Disconnect the cable to the OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.

[8] Remove the existing OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD.

[9] Install the FOPCIL BOARD into:

(a) Slot 7 in the MIM 200, 1 GHz

(b) Slot 7 in the MIM 200, 2.4 GHz

[10] Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in Figure 3–34 on Page 3 – 40 .

[11] Replace the COVER for the MIM.

[12] Energize the MIM.

[13] At the “MIM Service Application” window, select “Configure/Destination.” The “Installed Destination” window displays.

[14] Configure the MIM for the new LASER PRINTER by completing the following procedures:

Section 5 - “Setting up a Printer”

Section 6 - “Configuring a Print Server,” “Setting up the Destination”

Section 8 - “Obtaining Optimum Images”

Section 9 - “Completing the Installation”

Note

A 30 day warranty ONLY is included with the new FIBER OPTIC BOARD and the MIM.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 10-1

SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally blank.

10-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Section 11: Troubleshooting

Introduction

This section provides instructions for troubleshooting the:

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 (MIM 200)

• Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 (MIM 100)

• Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER (25 PS)

Troubleshooting includes:

Identification and location of field replaceable parts inside the MIM 100 and MIM 200 1.2 GHz enclosure.

Procedures for using the “MIM Service Application” to run diagnostics

Instructions for using the Activity History Log, Error History Log, and Console Log

Samples of logs

Procedures for using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE to run diagnostics

Information on Power-On Self Test (beep codes, power-on problems)

Instructions for troubleshooting the Common Protocol Optical Interface

Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE, CD ROM DRIVE, or FLOPPY DRIVE

ESD

Possible damage from electrostatic discharge.

The parts inside the MIM are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge. Use proper grounding equipment during all service procedures.

[1] Loosen the screw securing the MIM COVER and it as shown.

H180_3042AC

[2] If removing the HARD DRIVE only, remove the 4 SCREWS securing the HARD DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY. If removing the CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE, remove all 6 SCREWS.

[3] Detach the RIBBON CABLE(S) and POWER CABLE(S) from the drive. See Figure 0–1.

[4] Lift the DRIVE out of the DRIVE BAY. Position the new DRIVE in the DRIVE BAY.

[5] Secure the DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY with the SCREWS.

[6] Replace the MIM COVER and secure it with the SCREW.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-1

SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 0–1 Replacing the Hard Drives

H180_3041GC

Connecting to a MIM

To use the troubleshooting procedures in this section, you must connect your Laptop Computer to the MIM using the

“SecureLink” authentication and encryption software. For step-by-step connection procedures, see “Connecting Your LAPTOP

COMPUTER to a MIM” on Page 2 – 23 .

Finding an Unknown MIM IP Address

[1] Use pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE or a MONITOR KIT to access the MIM Windows 2000 desktop.

[2] Log on to Windows:

• Press the C-A-D icon for the pcAnywhere application.

• Press Ctrl-Alt-Del for the MONITOR KIT.

[3] Enter:

• Username: PACSLinkIP

• Password: NetServer

Note

A SecureLink session ID is not required.

[4] Click [OK].

The “ipconfig” utility will run and display current network settings for the MIM.

[5] Press C-A-D to return to the Windows log on screen.

Tools for Troubleshooting

The main tools for troubleshooting MIMs are the “MIM Service Application” and “pcAnywhere.”

• The “MIM Service Application” is the primary tool for troubleshooting. See the next paragraph for descriptions of its functions.

• pcAnywhere is the secondary tool for troubleshooting, but it includes some features that the “MIM Service Application” does not. For procedures to start pcAnywhere and communicate with the MIM, see “Using pcAnywhere” on Page 2 – 33 .

11-2 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting with the “MIM Service Application”

Running a Test Print Using the “MIM Service Application”

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Diagnostics>System.

Troubleshooting

[4] Select the “Print Test Image” box only. Then click [Run].

[5] Select the “Pattern” type from the 7 options to be printed and the “Image Size.”

[6] Click [OK].

Note

If a MIM has more than 1 destination, the test print will be sent to the currently selected or default print destination.

[7] Check the quality of the print.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-3

SERVICE MANUAL

Running a Test Print Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD

[1] Select the [Menu] button on the KEYPAD.

[2] Using the Arrow keys, advance from the “Service” menu to the “Diagnostic” menu to the “Test Print” menu.

[3] Select “Grayscale Print.”

[4] Check the quality of the test print.

Running a Network “Ping” Test from the “MIM Service Application”

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Diagnostics>Network.

[4] Select the “Ping” field only and click [Run].

[5] Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to enter the IP Address of the network target.

[6] Click [OK].

[7] Check that Ping was successful.

11-4 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Running Network Ping from the DISPLAY KEYPAD

[1] Select the [Menu] button on the KEYPAD.

[2] Using the Arrow keys, advance from the “Service” menu to the “Diagnostic” menu.

[3] Select “Network Ping.”

[4] Check that Ping was successful.

Running a Network “DICOM Echo” Test

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Diagnostics>Network.

Troubleshooting

[4] Select the “DICOM Echo” field only and click [Run].

[5] Enter the IP Address, Port Number, and AE Title of the network target. Then click [OK].

[6] Check that DICOM Echo was successful.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-5

SERVICE MANUAL

Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS

The procedure includes tests for the following INTERFACE BOARDS:

• The DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD

• The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS

• The OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD, COPPER INTERFACE (COPCIL) BOARD, and FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE

(FOPCIL) BOARD

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Diagnostics.

[4] Select tests as follows:

• For tests of the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD, select Digital.

• For tests of a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD, select Video.

• For tests of an OUTPUT BOARD, select Delivery. The options are Optical, COPCIL, and FOPCIL.

[5] Select as necessary from the options and click [OK].

[6] Observe the following notes about DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD tests:

Important

The OPTO-ISOLATOR test fails if the OPTO-ISOLATOR BOARD is not installed.The diagnostics for the DIGITAL

INTERFACE BOARD include tests of the:

• Registers & Interrupts

• FIFO & RAM

• MODALITY INTERFACE

• OPTO-ISOLATOR

[7] Observe the following notes about VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD tests:

Important

If MODALITY Capture Tests fail, the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is not necessarily defective:

• The Input Video may not be present.

• The parameters entered in the MIM may not match the parameters for the MODALITY, or they may be incorrect.

The diagnostics for the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD include the following tests:

• General Tests

• Memory Tests

• MODALITY Capture Tests

• Simulated Capture Tests

11-6 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Changing Level of a Log for Troubleshooting

The range of detail level for all log subsystems is 0 -7. The higher the level, the more detail in the log for any subsystem. The levels should be changed only for troubleshooting. See the table below for the communication purposes of the logs and the optimum logging levels for troubleshooting:

Log Communication Purpose

Delivery PRINT SERVER to PRINTER communications

General/Hardware HIS/RIS, communications to Kodak DryView LASER

IMAGERS

KEYPAD Auxiliary KEYPADS

Network Services DICOM input/output

Service Service functions

Source

Storage

Autofilming, KEYPAD acquisition and print commands

Disk space, aging algorithm

Optimum Log Level for V_6.0 and above

All: 3

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Logs.

[4] Select Logging Levels from the pull-down menu.

[5] To change a “Logging Level” for any subsystem:

(a) Click the Increment or Decrement button next to the name and level number of the subsystem.

(b) Click [Set].

Important

• See the table above for recommended log levels for each subsystem.

• Changing Log Levels only impacts active history after the time of the change.

[6] After completing troubleshooting, reset the log level by selecting “Default” and clicking [Reset].

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-7

SERVICE MANUAL

Retrieving the Activity History Log

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Logs.

[4] Set the Logging Level as instructed in the preceding procedure.

[5] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Activity History.

Note

The date/time of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM should match to enable correct time selections.

[6] Enter “View From” and “View Through” dates and times for the log to be retrieved, according to the time set at the MIM.

Note

The right 2 boxes in the “View” fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours. For example,

23 and 41 corresponds to 11:41 PM.

[7] Use the “Filter” drop-down menus to select the “Input” and the “Subsystem” log you want to retrieve.

[8] Click [OK].

[9] Select the mode of retrieval:

• To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [View Log].

• To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [Save As].

11-8 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Interpreting the Activity History Log

The retrieved Activity History Log includes data from all subsystems that were operating during the time selected for retrieval, except for subsystems that were filtered out. The log will display this data at the selected level of detail. Following is a sample section of an Activity History Log.

Date

Time Log Class Object Source File Line No. Comment

Level ID ID Name

Key to Columns in the Sample Log:

• Date - Date of log is selected on “Get Activity History” window.

• Time - Time is in military (24 hour) day.

• Log Level - Level of detail. Where the letter “I” (Information), “W” (Warning), or “E” (Error) is displayed in the Log Level field, this line is included in the Error Log.

• Class ID - This information identifies the subsystem logged and is used by development for troubleshooting.

• Object ID - This information is used by development for troubleshooting.

• Source Name - Name of the input that generated the log information.This could be DICOM or the name of the directly connected video or digital input. Each DICOM SCU will have a unique source name.

• File - Name of the file for this line in the program.

• Line No. - Number of the line in the file.

• Comment - Description of the function in the program of this line.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-9

SERVICE MANUAL

Retrieving the Error History Log

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Logs.

[4] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Error History.

Note

Log Levels do not apply to the Error History Log. All errors are logged.

[5] Enter “View From” and “View Through” dates and times for the log to be retrieved.

Note

The right 2 boxes in the “View” fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours. For example,

23 and 41 corresponds to 11:41 PM

[6] Click [OK].

[7] Select the mode of retrieval:

• To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [View Log].

• To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER, click [Save As].

11-10 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Interpreting the Error History Log

Troubleshooting

Key to Columns in the Error Log

• Severity - “Info” = Information only (no error). “Fatal” = Error condition causes system to stop. “Warning” = Error condition, but system continues to run.

• Error Code - Series of digits to the left of the (-) is the error code. Series of 3 digits to the right of the hyphen is the source code. See the table below for categories of errors.

• Date/Time - Date/Time can be selected by user. Time is in military (24 hour clock) days.

• Description - Describes the error.

Table 11–1 Error Code Categories

Error Codes

0-599

600-699

1000-1999

2000-2999

3000-3999

4000-4999

5000-5999

6000-6999

General

Subsystem

Hardware

Service

Source

Delivery

Network Services

Storage

KEYPAD

Object or operation not found

Types of Error

Buffer too small. Invalid firmware. Memory test error.

Diagnostic not found. DAD message error.

Command device not ready. Error reading or writing image.

Page full. Invalid curve shape. Failure sending image to PRINTER.

Problem in DICOM delivery. Wrong information for MIM.

Memory access error. “Disk Low Water Mark” not reached.

KEYPAD cannot send the message. KEYPAD test failure.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-11

SERVICE MANUAL

Retrieving the Error Frequency Log

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Logs.

[4] From the “Logs” pull-down menu, select Error Frequency.

[5] In the “Retrieve” panel, select one of the following:

• “System” (Windows NT Operating System)

• “MIM Application” (all logging subsystems for MIM)

• “KELI-160 Application”

[6] If you chose “MIM Application,” enter “Error Code From” and “Error Code To” numbers.

[7] Click [OK].

[8] At the prompt, click [View Log].

[9] To save the log, click [Save As].

11-12 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Clearing the Error Frequency Log

Important

Use this function after repairing a problem to observe if the “Error Frequency Log” indicates the error again.

[1] From the “MIM Service Application” window, select Logs>Clear Error Frequency Log.

[2] Click [Clear].

[3] At the prompt “Are you sure?” click [Yes].

Viewing Printing Statistics

The MIM uses print counters:

• For PRINT SERVERS: From a source on DICOM.

• For MODALITY SERVERS: From direct input from a MODALITY, video or digital.

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the “MIM Service Application.”

[2] Select Connect>Connect to MIM.

[3] Select Admin.

[4] From the Admin pull-down menu, select Printing Statistics Database.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-13

SERVICE MANUAL

Note

The MIM has the ability to reset a particular counter or all counters.

11-14 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

**Troubleshooting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE**

Using “Live Console Logs”

The preceding procedures describe use of the Activity History Log and the Error History Log, which allow the FE to view logs of system operations that have occurred in the past. The following paragraphs provide information for viewing logs of operations

as the operations occur. The console log subsystems are the same as those for the Activity History Logs. Figure 11–2

indicates the sources of data for the logs.

Figure 11–2 Console Log Data Sources

MODALITY

Grayscale

Video

Autofilming

Link

Service

MODALITY

SERVER

DICOM over

Ethernet

FORMAT= 24

END

EXAM

COPIES= 1

MAIN

Keypad

SERVER

Service

PRINTER

Keypad

Source

(Import)

Storage

Network

Services

Network

Services

Service

Routing/

Delivery

System

General

MODALITY

Grayscale

Video

Service

MODALITY

SERVER

H180_3031DC

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-15

SERVICE MANUAL

To View the Logs:

[1] Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM.

[2] Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM.

The MIM desktop will display on the LAPTOP COMPUTER.

Remote Network Interface

Menu Bar

[3] From the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select Logging.

Important

Do not use any features on the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar except “Logging”.

[4] Select Start AppConsoleLogger.

The log displays.

11-16 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Note

The defaults for Log Level are preset to the correct level for troubleshooting purposes as shown.

[5] At the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select SetLogLevel.

[6] At the “Console” menu bar, select View.

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-17

SERVICE MANUAL

[7] In the “Format” panel of the ‘Settings” window, select the fields you wish to display in the log.

Note

For troubleshooting, the most useful fields are Comment, Log Level, Time, and SRC Name. With these fields selected, a log line appears as indicated below:

09:55:05:058 2 [ ] SCU Assoc#29022 Up (XRAY 8200)

| | | | |

Time Log Level SRC Name Comment

[8] After “filtering” the fields, click [OK].

[9] When finished, at the “Remote Network Interface” menu bar, select Logging.

[10] Select Stop AppConsoleLogger.

11-18 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

Network Services Log

DICOM communications between an SCU and an SCP normally occur in the sequence indicated in the table below. Each of the command functions is described following the table.

Sequence Command Function

Negotiations between SCU and SCP.

Get PRINTER status.

Create a film session.

Create a film box.

Set the image box.

Print.

End the job.

End the session.

Command

Open an association prNGet fsNCreate fbNCreate ibNSet fbNAction fbNDelete fsNDelete

1. Negotiation Phase - A new connection is opened and communication between SCU and SCP occurs as in the sample printout below:

11/29/01 13:32:38:839 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,836] - SCP Assoc#4:===> NEW CONNECTION OPENED <===

11/29/01 13:32:38:859 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,840] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Modality AE Title = MIMP

11/29/01 13:32:38:889 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,845] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Host IP Address = 149.98.199.86

11/29/01 13:32:38:919 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,846] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement Version Name =

11/29/01 13:32:38:939 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,847] - SCP Assoc#4: SCU/Implement UID = 1.2.840.113564.3.1.3

11/29/01 13:32:38:970 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1466] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination AE Title = MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:000 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1504] - SCP Assoc#4: Destination Name = MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:030 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1523] - SCP Assoc#4: The Default Printer is 83

11/29/01 13:32:39:050 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1538] - SCP Assoc#4: No perfect Name match for MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:080 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1603] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique ShortName match for MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:110 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1730] - SCP Assoc#4: No unique Type match for Destination MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:140 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1734] - SCP Assoc#4: Using the Default Printer for Destination MIM

11/29/01 13:32:39:160 5 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,1743] - SCP Assoc#4: The Printer being used for this session is 83

11/29/01 13:32:39:270 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,710] - SCP Assoc#4: Verification SOP negotiated.

11/29/01 13:32:39:300 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,694] - SCP Assoc#4: Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated.

11/29/01 13:32:39:330 3 [ ] [MIMPrintAcse.cpp,706] - SCP Assoc#4: Presentation LUT SOP negotiated.

11/29/01 13:32:39:360 2 [ ] [MIMDicomDevice.cpp,59] - SCP Assoc#4 Up for 83 from modality MIMP

2. prNGet - Get PRINTER status. The MODALITY (SCU) asks for the status and characteristics of the PRINTER that is connected to the PRINT SERVER.

11/29/01 13:32:40:321 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3753] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending Printer SOP [N-GET]

11/29/01 13:32:40:352 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3792] - SCP Assoc#4: Sending status for 83=> Severity:NORMAL Status:NORMAL. (N-Get)

8E8820 – NOV 2003 11-19

SERVICE MANUAL

3. fsNCreate - Create a film session. Information about the film is communicated between the MODALITY (SCU) and the

PRINT SERVER (SCP). This includes number of copies, priority, type of medium, film destination, and status.

11/29/01 13:32:39:711 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1670] - SCP Assoc#4: Creating Film Session (FS) [N-CREATE]

11/29/01 13:32:39:761 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1689] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Contrast: 0 (from Connection DB)

11/29/01 13:32:39:831 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1746] - SCP Assoc#4: FS default Modality: CT (from Dicom)

11/29/01 13:32:39:891 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1817] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Film Session (FS) [N-SET]

11/29/01 13:32:39:921 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1826] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Copies: 1

11/29/01 13:32:39:961 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1888] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Print Priority: MED

11/29/01 13:32:39:991 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1982] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Using FilmBase from Connection DB

11/29/01 13:32:40:021 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,2002] - SCP Assoc#4: FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM

4. fbNCreate - Create a film box. The command to create a film box defines how the image will appear on film. The information communicated includes: film size, type, orientation, format, contrast, density, trim, configuration information (TFT/ULUT), etc.

11/29/01 13:32:42:625 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,848] - SCP Assoc#4: Setting Image Box (IB) for Position 1 [N-SET]

11/29/01 13:32:42:655 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3566] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Rows: 480

11/29/01 13:32:42:685 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3576] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Columns: 748

11/29/01 13:32:42:715 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Allocated: 8

11/29/01 13:32:42:745 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3601] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Bits Per Pixel (stored): 8

11/29/01 13:32:42:775 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3632] - SCP Assoc#4: IB High Bit: 7

11/29/01 13:32:42:805 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3649] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Pixel Aspect Ratio: 13:15

11/29/01 13:32:42:835 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,3679] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Photometric Interpretation: MONOCHROME2

11/29/01 13:32:42:885 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1166] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Polarity: NORMAL (from Dicom)

11/29/01 13:32:42:915 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1197] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Magnification Type: CUBIC

11/29/01 13:32:42:945 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1215] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Smoothing Type: 15

11/29/01 13:32:42:975 4 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1333] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Configuration Information: LUT=Ver693c0.w87,0

11/29/01 13:32:43:005 3 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1452] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set TFT: Ver693c0.w87

11/29/01 13:32:43:035 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1453] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Set Dry Contrast: 6

11/29/01 13:32:43:065 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1515] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Body Part: DEFAULT (from Connection DB)

11/29/01 13:32:43:156 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1583] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Color Profile: @DEF0 (from Connection DB)

11/29/01 13:32:43:196 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1616] - SCP Assoc#4: IB Image Tone Adjustment: 0 (from Connection DB)

11/29/01 13:32:43:246 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1040] - SCP Assoc#4: IB found an Image's PLUT

11/29/01 13:32:43:276 5 [DICOM] [PrintSCPService.cpp,1063] - SCP Assoc#4: IB uses PLUT uid: 1.2.840.113564.3.5040.2001.11.29

11-20 NOV 2003 – 8E8820

Troubleshooting

5. ibNSet - Set the image box. This command sends image data to a defined location on film. The MODALITY transfers the image data along with position and size information and assigns a job number. Information provided includes: rows and columns, bit depth, aspect ratio, polarity, magnification and smoothing type, etc.